JP2019107533A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game by increasing an opportunity enabling acquisition of a game state equivalent to a high-value win.SOLUTION: In a game machine including a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state differing from the first game state, the game machine includes lottery game execution means capable of executing a lottery game based on entry of a game medium into a winning area within a game area, game state shifting means capable of shifting from the first game state to the second game state with derivation of a specific result by the lottery game as an opportunity, and advantageous game state shifting means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state more advantageous to a player than the second game state in the second game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 204

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  Heretofore, it has been known that this type of gaming machine performs a lottery game based on the game ball winning in a winning area of the gaming area. And there are a plurality of types of winning results for the lottery game, and there are cases in which the advantage of the gaming state after the hitting game differs depending on which winning is made. Since the player is expected to win in the highest value hit, it is disappointed even if it is won in the low value. Therefore, there is a system in which low-value hits are made to be purely enjoyed by sequentially performing a yes or no presentation from high-value hits (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2012-148017, A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the game state after winning the game remains the advantage corresponding to the low value hit where the contingency effect is devised, and an advantageous game state equivalent to a high value hit can not be obtained. , Had reduced the interest in gaming.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest of gaming by increasing the chance of acquiring a gaming state equivalent to a high-value hit. It is to do.

  In one aspect of a representative gaming machine according to the present invention, a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, a winning area in a gaming area Lottery game execution means capable of executing a lottery game based on winning of game media to the game state, and a game state capable of transitioning from the first game state to the second game state triggered by the lottery game deriving a specific result An advantageous gaming state transitioning means capable of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, triggered by the transition means and that the number of times of execution of the lottery game has reached a predetermined number in the second gaming state. And predetermined number determination means capable of determining the predetermined number so as to be different depending on the identification result.

  Here, the “first gaming state” and the “second gaming state” are the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in the fifth embodiment, respectively. The "advantage game state" is the rush mode in the fifth embodiment. The “specific result” is a result of deriving the big hit, and corresponds to the first big hit B to E in the fifth embodiment. The "predetermined number of times" is the number of time-saving times set to the first big hit B to E in the fifth embodiment.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that solves the above-mentioned problems and can suppress the decrease in interest in gaming.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view at the time of seeing the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the game panel of embodiment different from the example, such as FIG. 104, and was seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board after the display of FIG. 107; FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front component of embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 grade | etc., And was seen from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board when FIG. 110 is viewed later. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special prize winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a periphery side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interruption board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal sound signal blocking board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening prize winning process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during the 1st change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving function setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during 2nd fluctuation | variation of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of gate passage processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol normal processing of this embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of this embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart explaining simultaneous fluctuation control of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart shown about the ideal game mode transition in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence about an example of the submain process of this embodiment performed by periphery control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular processing performed every 16 ms by submain processing. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural view of an attacker device, (B) is a front view showing a functional display unit in an enlarged manner, and (C) is a front view showing a seven-segment display in an enlarged manner. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of the 2nd embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an outline of a control pattern of a simultaneous change control structure of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hitting game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right hitting penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right-handed penalty alerting | reporting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 1st change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of forced removal effect addition processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, and (B) is a special symbol variation when additional release notification effect is set in the forced removal effect addition processing 5 is a timing chart of effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the restart production | presentation change process in the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of production after resumption in resumption production change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the modification of the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the modification of the discontinuation control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining reset setting in a reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switching production process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining switching production control of a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switching effect execution process of the modification of 3rd Embodiment, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st switching effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable role thing production process in 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the effect transition which demonstrates the movable role item control of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 1st change in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 2nd in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hitting game processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pseudo rendering process in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart explaining conventional game mode transition, (B) and (C) is a timing chart explaining game mode transition and a false effect of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ST frequency display processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining ST display control in a liquid crystal display device of a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of 4th Embodiment. It is an example of the various tables which show the game specifications of the 1st special symbol of the 4th embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure explaining an outline of a control pattern of a simultaneous change control structure of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st process in the middle in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of time saving function setting processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking | linkage setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the 2nd in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking | linkage setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round production | presentation setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect transition in the big hit game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining characteristic game specification of modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure explaining characteristic game specification of modification 2 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of the game state (game mode) of modification 2 of a 4th embodiment. It is a table showing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery of the fifth embodiment. It is a table which shows a hit kind and distribution ratio of the 1st special symbol of a 5th embodiment. It is a table which shows a hit kind and distribution ratio of the 2nd special symbol of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure explaining effect mode transition in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows transition of the game state (game mode) of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production mode setting process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation execution process in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect transition in 5th Embodiment.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. A hand or the like is inserted, and it is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as moving away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook 20c Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for supporting the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in main frame support holes (not shown) formed in the main frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 67) of the main frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be widened. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

[Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wire holding member 197 for holding a part of the wire 196 (see FIG. 28) connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wire 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the bowl unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. As will be described later in detail, the main relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extended backward, as will be described later. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, the mounting boss 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and the mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are suitably positioned. Each is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the mounting boss 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding band is attached to the holding holes 197a paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring 196 can be held by inserting the 198 and tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3 As a result, it is pushed forward and pivots in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thus, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end of the wire holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wire 196 extending from the free end of the wire holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the folded wire 196 on the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wire 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. As it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and is held so that a part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction, On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wire 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wire holding member 197, and the wire 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, the upper and lower sides of the door frame 5 may be opened and closed even if a force is applied through the wire 196. It is possible to make it difficult to move in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be reliably folded in the lateral direction to prevent occurrence of a defect.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. Respective decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball lending units 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. Or it can be set as the door frame 5, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention property with respect to a fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 112). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. (See 112), and can prevent the insertion of the tool, and can prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as it is disassembled and seen afterward.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably made to the player side It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in front view, and the upper end back side of the horn portion The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, respectively. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has a high degree of light transmission under the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282 b facing the inside of the central frame 281 a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282 a And an extension frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the dish unit in the door frame, cut at a portion of the ball lending unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right lower surface and having a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface. And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view An upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328, the lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the right side and the right side from the left, right center position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 And Shitasara side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 And a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge it forward.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g, and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g by the gaming balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more games A ball can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312, and a decorative attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest. And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to become lower toward the front side and to the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  Further, the lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. The lower plate lower left side cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to one side of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. It has a plate-like part that forms a part. The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left side cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the lower speaker 821 (speech speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the player receives the sound from the lower speaker 821 It can be made to be transparent to the side. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted therein. .

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left side cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left side cover The bottom surface between them and 334 is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing passage 344c on which the game ball can roll.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. As a result, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding channel 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and the lower bowl ball supply port 310g from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. Can be discharged into the

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 etc. While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 in the tray unit 300 is disposed between the lower tray side cover 330 and the lower tray lower left side cover 334 on the lower side of the lower tray main body 324 to form the bottom central portion of the tray unit 300. A ball-opening base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower-disc ball-extracting base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower-disc ball-extracting hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324; It has a lower countersink slide 353 supported so as to move and slide on the upper surface of the lower counterball recess 351 in the front-rear direction, and a lower countersink 354 attached to the front end of the lower countersink 353. ing.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. In addition, the opening and closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a that can close the lower flat ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter round hole that is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower flat ball opening hole 324b. , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact the lower disc ball slide 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower ball chop slide 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move rearward by the lower opening ball slide 353, or the lower opening slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided to hold the lower countersink slide 353 at a predetermined position in order to hold it in the movement position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc flash slide 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc flash slide 353 toward the rear The open / close shutter 352 turns against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is rotated backward, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slide 353 is moved rearward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower countersink 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball ball slide 353 is locked (held), the lower ball ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball hole 352b is a lower ball ball. The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The rental ball unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b formed in the upper end decoration portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 that protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 is disposed on the transparent rental unit front cover 365 covering the front side of the rental remaining display portion 363, and behind the rental ball unit front cover 365, and the rental remaining display portion 363 is attached. Ball unit base 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached (see FIG. 45) and the ball unit of the bowl unit base 310 covering the back side of the ball unit substrate 366 And a rear cover 367 mounted on the rear side of the mounting portion 310b. The crime prevention cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

  The rental ball unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the rental ball unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. Transparent including a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a ball unit front cover 365 and a projection 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward, respectively, and closing the display opening 310n A remaining-loan display portion 363 disposed on the rear side through the rental ball unit front cover 365 can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new model pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 which is easy to select as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disc-like drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410; An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b in the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end is opposed and then project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are coupled so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b, and the operation portion holding member 416 An inner-shaped opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a to the lower recess 420b and can accommodate at least the driven gear 410; Is equipped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding therefrom. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion 401d can not pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Is equipped. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from coming upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted with a positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation part 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed through the step part 407a and the projecting part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (dish unit 300) Since it is possible to receive the weight, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation unit 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, so that problems with the dial drive motor 414 due to overheating can be prevented, and the dial drive motor 414 Be able to withstand high loads and Ri, it is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial drive motor 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, the player can be given an operation feeling with respect to the pressing operation unit 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the drawing, on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower tray side cover 330 in the tray unit 300. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing strength is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the gaming balls fired toward the game area 1100 reach the right area to the right of the center character 2500 and this right area Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing strength becomes smaller than a predetermined value, the gaming ball fired toward the gaming area 1100 flows down the left side area on the left side of the center character 2500. In this manner, it is possible to hit the gaming ball into the right area and the left area by the operation of the player. The ball speed of the gaming ball flowing down the right side area on the right side of the center character 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of the gaming ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center character 2500. And the game ball which flows down the right side area with relatively fast ball speed becomes possible to be able to win the 2nd starting opening 2102 which it mentions later, the game ball which flows down the left side area with relatively slow ball speed it mentions later Winning of the first starting opening 2101 is possible.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. It is possible to That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle unit 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) The rotational drive can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The steering apparatus 500 according to the present embodiment electrically detects the rotation operation of the steering wheel main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512 and, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of the trouble in the joint unit, to control the decrease in the player's interest due to the hitting trouble of the game ball It has to be able to bet.

  In the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 (firing solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 gaming balls are sequentially fired at predetermined intervals in one minute. It is driven to reach the hitting speed (pace). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the handle device 500 is performed (maintained), the game balls are successively hit in the game area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[Fall cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door cover in an exploded manner, and FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view taken after the camera (B) disassembled the cover unit. Moreover, FIG. 53 is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball inlet 542a disposed in the upper right corner and penetrating in the front-rear direction in rear view, and the first ball inlet 542a. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of the cover base 542 to the right in front view, and a second ball inlet disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a 542c and a second ball passage 542d which is in communication with the second ball inlet 542c and which is extended downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view inside the cover base 542; The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the false cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. The swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of a game ball.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, If the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540 and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also full, gaming balls roll to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 Second ball inlet 542c, second ball passage 542d, and second ball outlet 544 of the far cover unit 540 from the full ball outlet 776 of It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118). The user is notified that the player is urged to discharge the gaming balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[Antistatic measure for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the fal cover unit 540 (the transparent polycarbonate molded article) (see FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53) includes the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. A storage space 546 for retaining the game ball is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, so that the game ball and the resin rub against each other to generate static electricity and charge the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal ground rail 554 is provided for removing static electricity of the gaming ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the gaming ball and discharging it to the lower plate. There is. In addition, the fowl cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-like ground fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground fitting 556 at the left end can conduct electricity to the ground rail 554 at the bottom of the fal cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). This earth metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

  Although the second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in this part of polycarbonate, and may reach 10 several kV. Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, even if the charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only the very periphery is removed, and most of it remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge.

  In the gaming machine, an earth wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

  The embodiment described below is made in view of such a situation, and the charge accumulated in the fall cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction even if the ground is not taken. The invention relates to an invention relating to an anti-static mechanism for shielding the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and preventing the static electricity released to the shield metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame showing a state in which the anti-static mechanism is provided, as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of an essential part of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (thin plate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to the charge accumulated in the far cover unit 540. Shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed into an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the charge jumping to the shield plate 562 from jumping to the surrounding conductors And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-like conductive portion 563 which is conductively contacted by contacting the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 at the upper part in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 568 bent in the left-right direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 located below and behind the conductive portion 563 with the border as a boundary, and disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 And.

  In the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an attachment portion 565 extending in a substantially semi-circular shape is formed, and an insertion hole 566 is bored in the attachment portion 565. Is drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and serves to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from the surrounding electrical conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the insulating sheet 570 is attached by adhesion to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562.

  In FIGS. 55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the anti-static mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, shield plate 562 is arranged such that the outer peripheral edge of shield portion 564 is surrounded by insulating sheet 570 on the back surface of insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562 so as to be sandwiched. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 is brought into conductive contact by coming in contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5, thereby releasing static electricity.

  Note that mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for attachment to the fall cover unit 540 are provided at appropriate places on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (the door frame base body 110). In addition, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the earth metal fitting 556 to the metal lower reinforcement sheet metal 154 so as to release static electricity to appropriate places of the lower reinforcement sheet metal 154. , 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss 110g into the insertion hole 566, and a screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame It is screwed to the base body 110.

  The front cover 544 is disposed on the rear surface of the shield plate 562 so that the front cover 544 is in surface contact, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion thereof, and the screw is screwed into the mounting bosses 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back of the door frame base main body 110. In addition, a screw is inserted through the mounting portion of the ground metal 556, and a screw is further inserted through the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is electrostatically charged by screwing the screw. It is screwed to the door frame base main body 110 so as to escape.

  The shield plate 562 and the fal cover unit 540 are fastened together by screws to the mounting boss 110g. In addition, in the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a ground wire (not shown) is fastened together with a ground fitting 556 with a screw.

[Function of Antistatic Mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the false cover unit 540 escapes to the metallic lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the conductive part 563 in surface contact with the shielding part 564 of the shielding plate 562 in surface contact and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-like shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction by the charge accumulated in the fal cover unit 540.

  In addition, since the shield plate 562 is disposed so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the charge jumped to the shield plate 562 from the corners or end face of the shield portion 564 Things and harnesses can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. FIG. 58 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 60A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 61 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. (D) is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a turns in the direction of the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 60) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight 583 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 60B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in a back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose entire outer diameter in a rear view is horizontally long, and is opposite to the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. Of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c which are divided up and down with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of V formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to be away from each other And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played on the game area of the gaming board 4. When driven into the interior 1100, the illegal gaming ball I fired by the striking device 650 moves along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It tries to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is a passage of the game ball It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance inside. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 61D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal gaming ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, the portion between the outer rail 1111 and the firing rail 660 does not enter the gaming area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud preventing member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 1100. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and the game ball is hit. The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It can be controlled to increase.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. , In a front view right side of the lower plate 302, for driving the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper side of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 viewed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side is a sharp and artificial metallic appearance ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Also, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[Luminous decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.63 and FIG.64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 64 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 214a and 216a that emit light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball release button 341 can be lighted and decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 63 and FIG. 64) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b in the upper decorative unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing, operation direction, and the like of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are played Can be notified to

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a and 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a and 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player is given a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability changing gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability changing time short playing status , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109 c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that urges the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

Body frame base
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side projecting to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is lowered from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game ball to roll. The main unit frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800, and the game ball obtained by rolling the ball extraction passage 741d in the award ball device 740 will be described later in detail. Is supposed to roll.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b extending, a door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extension portion And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642b and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the open side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Ball launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed so as to be integral with the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 102 etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing device 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotary body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing the ball rolling passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The winning ball device 740 paying out based on the instruction and the gaming ball paid out by the winning ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of gaming balls It mainly comprises a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the award ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown also in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an oblong box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape with a long plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) in a rectangular shape in a plan view from the bottom wall 721; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and on the front both ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Award the tank 720 to the ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 to be described later, and the game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) which opens downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 78) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734 a of the ball holding plate 734 so that the projection 735 a of the ball stopper 735 passes through the slit 734 b and is inside the tank rail 731. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 b of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  Also, the prize ball device 740 is a ball out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a, and of the gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. The count sensor 751 for measuring the number, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 A relay board 754 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the sensor substrate 753 and the payout motor 744, the ball breakage switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control substrate 4110; Is equipped.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the back surface of the back cover 742; the first gear 745, the second gear 746, And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 interposed, and a supply channel that can contact the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741 a of the unit base 741 An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be removable from the unit base 741 And an attach / detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741 a by the ball breakage switch 750. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the out-of-ball switch 750 (the out-of-ball state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hall It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated. It can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the payout switch 860b is operated, or the like. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side, and together with the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branching unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 It is possible to discharge to the rear side outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. The full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the center top And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. A prize ball receptacle 771 for receiving game balls having flowed down a prize ball passage 715 of a prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball receptacle 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83) The game ball is rolled forward from the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view and a full channel 775 for guiding the game ball forward from a position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 (FIG. three A), a full Tan passage 775 to release the rolling was game balls forward and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the gaming ball received in the extraction opening 777 to the front side and the gaming ball rolled on the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are large enough to roll the game balls in a plurality of rows, and the amount of game ball parked in the full tank branch unit 770 (storage amount) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is avoided that the total storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 decreases. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 and the opening and closing operation piece 542 g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 Longitudinally slit-shaped plural-pieces penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate unit base 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Further, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 favorably to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with the lower speaker 821 mounted facing the front. At the same time as sealing the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, the speaker box 820 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. The open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, though the detailed illustration is omitted, so that the phase of the sound on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 is reversed. It radiates forward and is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting more deep bass to the aperture of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is detached from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. It can be done (see Figure 67).

  Further, the launch power supply substrate box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately emitted from the power supply substrate 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is easy The interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving and firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed, and reaches the life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced. And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 receives the gaming balls discharged upward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the gaming board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, and Ejecting passage 842 and the front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward and the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600 is rolled to pass through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the back of the substrate unit base 810 The game ball which has flowed down to the side and the game ball which is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and which is received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 will be described later in detail. It can be discharged downward.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 is exposed on the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply substrate box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the upright wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c that project rearward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  The power supply substrate box 850 and the power supply substrate box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. The rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. And a delivery control substrate 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removing switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 4, a, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. It can be done.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 92, in the assembled state, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to tamper with insertion of needle-like electrodes through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opening portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, so the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 ( A needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and it is possible to have a high crime prevention capability Can be.

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 3 so that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 3 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are covered by a relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connection to the door frame 5 side come to the front side through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the locking piece 923a on the lower side of the body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 92 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. A holding member 925 mounted so as to sandwich the, and a. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. are coming to the rear side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. These through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and, with the game board 4 housed and held in the main body frame 3, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252, and the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. It can be evacuated. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 resiliently engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction and a front end of the side piece 952a as viewed from the front Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 in the game board 4 between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See Figure 112). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and the like disposed in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. In addition, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side (shaft support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend backward than the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a becomes long. Since the bending rigidity to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the side crime prevention plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating being performed .

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily made While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and high in durability and strength.

[Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main frame, which are provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for glass door and the sliding door for main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure that makes it difficult for an external user to tamper with the lock device 1000.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper part of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open side 1001a, 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part, and lower part of both side faces 1001 a and 1001 b, By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places in the upper, middle and lower of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the The fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 101B, it swings (clockwise in FIG. 101B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting control protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are penetrated in the left-right direction on the front side of the control protrusion 1031 and are vertically disposed are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 that protrudes forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, it protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72, etc.) formed in the main body frame base 600. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 and the door frame The lower end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide projection 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a door frame sliding It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of the crucible 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016 To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire ridge 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Insert the piece 1043 into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 and align and overlap the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 with each other. For the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame, while making the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005 .

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the opening 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 100A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 101 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be installed.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using the screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding wedge 1040 and a main frame sliding wedge 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the peripheral wall portion 605. It is good also as a structure stored, and the same operation effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above can be produced.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 On the back wall of the prize ball base 710, the prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710 b and a gaming ball discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 on the basis of a predetermined payout instruction. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 with a tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane as the rear face of the game board, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be inspected (visually inspected) easily without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4 It can be a pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[Basic composition of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 108 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using a front component member of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a gaming board showing FIG. FIG.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this gaming board 4 is not illustrated in FIGS. 102 to 109 and will be described in detail later, a front unit attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150 are further included. (See FIG. 113, FIG. 116, etc.).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The inner periphery of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 102 etc., the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow to the lower end of the game area 1100. Are guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower side of the back of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and fastening each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed And a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and the out port 1151 (see FIG. 105) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and within the range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a table unit 2000 is attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 with respect to the front component 1110 is It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the lateral side to the left end of the rear wall in a rear view in the rear wall. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[Master control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control substrate 4100 having electronic components, terminals, and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the substrate cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  Further, the main control board box 1170 is provided with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. The various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010 and the payout control board 4110 and the like are to be exposed to the rear side. Note that by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed except by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance It can be done.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 106A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED for playing, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the gaming status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 for the first, and the lottery result of the first special symbol which is disposed on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and is drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol arranged and received by receiving the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The second special symbol for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 comprising a special symbol display 1186 and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of the second special symbol display 1186 And a memory display 1187.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the common gate 2301 by the game ball Normal symbol memory indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the symbol, and an ordinary lottery result which is arranged under the ordinary symbol memory indicator and the lottery balls are drawn by passing the game ball through the common gate 2301 The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying as and the normal special symbol storage indicator 1188 are arranged side by side obliquely to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (condition device is Round display consisting of two LEDs to display the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 at the time of operation). It is provided with a 1190, a.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By the combination, various game states (for example, probability change state, time reduction state, probability change time short game state, big hit game state, etc.) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, at least the probability fluctuation state, the time shortening state, and the right hitting gaming state can be displayed. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game state which is advantageous for the player by firing the game ball in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500 (so-called "left-hand") and the game on the right side of the center character 2500. Since the game state which is advantageous for the player is mixed if the game ball is fired in the area 1100 (so-called “right-handed”), the timing for “right-handed” is clearly displayed on the player. As a result, even the game beginner can smoothly switch the striking method (the striking operation) along with the transition of the gaming state without making a mistake in striking "left strike" and "right strike".

  In addition, the gaming state indicator 1183 is not limited to one configured by one color LED, and may be configured by a plurality of LED groups or 7 segment LEDs. Any configuration may be employed as long as the player moves his / her eyes to the game state indicator 1183 during the game, so that it can easily grasp the current game state, in particular, whether it is a game state in which the user can strike the right.

  The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, but transmits this control signal to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later to allow the player to use the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is preferable to report "right-handed". Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in the front view (the end of the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when “right-handed” is notified in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the line of sight is on the left end of the front view It is possible for the player to switch to an appropriate strike method (drive operation) without transferring it.

  In addition, when the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b Turns on together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, both the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and after the 7 segment LED fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops after the change and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7 segment LED The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by the game ball passing through the regular drawing gate 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the common view gate 2301 when the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189, the start of the variable display is It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of a normal symbol held (stored). This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and lighting of these indicator lamps can indicate the number of rounds in the "big hit" game. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board (not shown). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared to the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. In order for the store clerks in the hall to be able to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without confusion You have me.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

[Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as those described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. It is formed. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating the front-rear direction Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Furthermore, the panel board 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center character 2500 etc. The unit which it has is designed to be inserted and fixed.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. The front inner circumferential surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example) is about 2.5 mm, which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010 c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227 And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010 c can be prevented from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4, can be used as the main unit frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010 c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the housing recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  Also, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward; A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting The panel plate 1210 can be set in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

Second Embodiment of Front Component Member
Next, a front component 1110A different from the front component 1110 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the game panel 1200, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 except for the difference.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that it has a function display unit 1180 in addition to a part of the inner circumferential shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit Prepared for 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-like inner circumferential shape extending clockwise in a front view from the out-out guide surface 1115 up to the stop 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stopper 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 ing. More specifically, the section from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right sticker sheet sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc, and from the lower end of the arc to the outlet. It is formed in the shape of a straight line inclined so that the distance up to the guiding surface 1115 is lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of this example can secure the game area 1100 more widely as compared with the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. It can be done.

[Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front and rear direction. A plate-like side piece 952a which forms a side of the main body frame 3 and a front end which extends inward in a substantially perpendicular direction (open side) from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the side security plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is axially supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively assumed. Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact so as to cover the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, it is a pachinko machine 1 having a rigid side, from the side It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the middle piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change. When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those should be outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. Further, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 117 is disassembled into main members constituting the game board (however, the center character 2500 is not shown) and obliquely viewed from behind. It is the seen perspective view.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A, which partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200 are provided.

  The game panel 1200 of this example is a plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is divided by the front component 1110A, and a transparent panel plate 1210 formed smaller than the front component 1110A. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000 A function display unit 1180 disposed at a position that can be viewed from the player through the transparent panel board 1210 and can be viewed from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) mounted on the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the back side Substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a wind turbine is provided at a predetermined position along the way. A center character 2500 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center character 2500.

  Further, behind the center character 2500, there is provided an effect display device 1900 for displaying effects with a large area in front view so as to attract attention from the player. As the effect display device 1900, a suitable display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decoration symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

  Further, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided which has a smaller display area than the liquid crystal display device 1900 to realize an auxiliary display effect. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information and the like obtained by combining the decoration symbol image information, background image information, character image information and the like.

  On the other hand, from the right side to the lower side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, from the upstream, the regular drawing gate 2301, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100, and the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101; A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, in the left side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided. In the lower area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, a constant winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101 is provided.

  Here, the first starting opening 2101 is a regular winning opening 2101 a where the game ball can always be won at a position substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the liquid crystal display device 1900. The game ball is configured to have a special winning opening 2101 b which can be won only when the movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 is operated on the right side. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101 a, special opening winning opening 2101 b), entering the same game ball by the first starting opening sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an after-mentioned attacker will be based on a random number for the first special symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range. The first special symbol lottery (the first special determination) is performed for the hit serving as the operation trigger of the device 2100, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Ru. When the player wins a hit, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of the later-described attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) configured to include a solenoid etc. is performed, and the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed accordingly. Will be operated. In this way, after the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed, transition control can be made to the time saving game state described later where improvement of the easiness of winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is achieved. .

  In addition, although it mentions later, in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, it is supposed that it has a control structure which can make the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol change simultaneously, and is made to start the change of the 2nd special symbol. It is arranged that the symbol variation according to the result of the first special symbol lottery can not be in the variation start waiting state.

  The common drawing gate 2301 is provided above the special prize winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow passage of a game ball driven into the right area of the center character 2500. Then, when there is an acceptance (pass) of the gaming ball to the common drawing gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) described later that the acceptance is made.

  At this time, if the predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normally based on the random number for the regular symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within the predetermined numerical range, if the predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied. A determination process (normal determination) is performed on a normal hit which is an operation trigger of the motorized part) 2111, and the normal symbol dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the player wins a normal hit, after the variation display is finished, the drive control of a common prize product drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118) described later that is configured to include a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is permitted through an opening operation in which the movable piece 2111 pivots the upper end rightward (clockwise) around the lower end. .

  That is, the special prize winning opening 2101b is inserted only when there is an opening operation by the movable piece 2111 (rotation operation of the upper end centering on the lower end of the movable piece 2111) in response to the normal hit. The ball is provided so that winning is possible. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 can not enter the gaming ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (a refusal ball aspect) and a mode enabling the same ball (permission It can be said that it is operable to switch between the ball mode and the ball mode, and is maintained in the refusal mode as long as the drive control of the common item driving mechanism 3114 is not performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), almost no winning of the game ball occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is hit in the right area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), so that the easiness of accepting the game ball is improved. The game characteristic centered on the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball to the winning opening 2101b is realized.

  In addition, the second starting opening 2102 is provided below the special winning opening 2101b, and is driven into the right area of the center role 2500, and special winnings of the special winning opening 2103 and the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker device 2100. The game ball which has not been accepted in the mouth 2101 b is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when the game ball is entered into the second start opening 2102, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by a second start opening sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker (to be described later) is based on a random number for a second special symbol periodically (for example, every 4 ms) updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range. The second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit serving as the operation trigger of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Ru. Then, when the hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the drive control of the later-described attacker drive mechanism 2121 (refer to FIG. 118) configured to include a solenoid etc. is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 Will be opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special prize winning opening 2101b, and configured to be able to receive a game ball hit into the right side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 when open. It is done.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, an opening and closing member 2106 operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106. Normally, it is closed by the opening and closing member 2106 so that the game ball can not be received in the big winning opening 2103.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (first special At the time of opening the special winning opening 2103 as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2102) (the second special symbol side hit game), The number of balls that can be received by the gaming balls is adjusted by making the control modes for opening the doors different.

  That is, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a determination result of either the first special determination or the second special determination, the attacker device 2100 opens the big winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. Thus, a jackpot game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit advantageous to the player. Therefore, three gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (first starting opening sensor 3131) and the second starting opening 2102 (second starting opening sensor 3132), When the gaming ball has won in the large winning opening 2103 (count sensor 2122a) provided for execution of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, 15 game balls are paid out. It should be noted that ten gaming balls are paid out when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133).

  By the way, in the short time game state (the rush preparation mode in this embodiment), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2111 is opened after the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops (specially designed winning opening 2101b The time for which the game ball is maintained at the right rotation side position where the game ball can be won is "5.5 seconds". That is, the game ball always wins normally when the game ball passes the regular drawing gate 2301, and then the time it takes for the passed game ball to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2111 is shorter (0 By stopping the variation of the normal symbol in .08 seconds), the game ball which is the trigger of the normal hit is made possible to win the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 as it is. According to such a configuration, in the time saving game state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being won in the second starting port 2102 which is provided further below the special winning hole 2101b and can accept the flowed-down game ball. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the short time game state where execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the game ball winning to the special winning opening 2101b is preferred.

  It should be noted that after the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (the position where the gaming ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", the movable piece 2111 is in the closed state (the gaming ball is in the special winning opening 2101b) Act to be an unacceptable position).

  Therefore, in the time-saving game state (lash preparation mode), the probability of winning a normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is further rotated to the right for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, hitting the right makes it easy to win the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time saving game state rush preparation mode), the center role object such that many gaming balls are won in the first starting port 2101 (specially-provided winning port 2101 b), not the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101 a). It is considered more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right strike") aiming at the right side of 2500.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-short game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in this embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is predetermined fluctuation time (for example 1 second) By setting it to), the reception of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is disabled.

  It should be noted that depending on whether or not the game is in the non-time-short game state, it is different whether it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the left or right of the center character 2500 depending on whether or not it is the probability variation game state. In the normal gaming state (normal mode) which is not a non-time-saving gaming state and not a probability changing gaming state, the left side of the center character 2500 is set so that many gaming balls will win the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. It is considered advantageous for the player to aim and shoot the game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Also, in the high probability non-time game state (rush mode) in which the non-time-short game state and the big hit winning probability is higher than the normal game state, there are many game balls in the second starting opening 2102 It is considered more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right strike") aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 to win a prize.

  In addition, as the time saving control, control to increase the winning probability of the above normal symbol than the non time saving game state, control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the above normal symbol than the non time saving game state, of the first starting opening 2101 Control to extend the period to maintain the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b at the right rotation side position than the non-time short game state, the number of times to move the movable piece 2111 to the right rotation side position than the non-time short game state Increasing control may be performed in any one or any combination (or all).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the back side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened and the opening which penetrates the back wall 3010a in the front and back direction where the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which a 3010 b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back up rendering unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010, and a back box A lower back rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010 b within the 3010, and a lower right back corner disposed between the lower back rendering unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the front right lower corner of the back box 3010 A presentation unit 3600 is mainly provided. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position where it can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that accommodates a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 will be described later in detail. A box 1910 is provided.

  The game board 4 of this embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can roll sufficiently between the outer periphery of the left side of the center character 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A) A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center product 2500 in the game area 1100.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500 (is hit with a strength higher than a predetermined strength), this game ball is upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center character 2500 from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width allowing game balls to flow down one ball at a time, and the game ball having flowed down the right passage 2545 is decelerated by the stopper 1114, and first, the path of the right passage 2545 The common map gate 2301 disposed above is reached. Thereafter, it is guided to the movable area of the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100. In this movable area, the gaming balls that are not received by the opening and closing member 2106 in the big winning opening 2103 are then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. The gaming ball flowing down the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and converted to the downward direction, and then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. Here, the gaming ball having passed through the upper spread gate 2301 is guided to the special prize winning opening 2101 b in which the movable piece 2111 can accept the gaming ball.

  In the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the gaming ball which has not been guided by the movable piece 2111 to be received by the special winning opening 2101b is decelerated again by the second induction portion 2902 and then guided to the second starting opening 2102 Be done. The game balls flowing down the right side passage 2545 are guided to the second starting opening 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless entering the large winning opening 2103 or the special winning opening 2101 b.

  As described above, in the time saving game state, the gaming ball which has been hit to the right and passed through the common drawing gate 2301 will be accepted by the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

  Then, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of performing such a game and the determination result of either the first special determination or the second special determination, the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 As a result, a jackpot game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 117 etc., this liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 through the fixing pieces 1902. ing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010 d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 protrudes from the right side in front view After the two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing parts 3010 e on the left side of the back box 3010 in the back view, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the locking mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward and closing the insertion port.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 accommodating the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118), and the lower portion of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By appropriately rotating the volume 1912 in the direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the lower speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3, etc. It has become.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light brightness white LED as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first start opening sensor 3131 that detects gaming balls received in the first start opening 2101 and a second start opening sensor that detects gaming balls received in the second start opening 2102 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3133 for detecting gaming balls received to the general winning opening 2201 are respectively input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, a gate sensor 2302, a count sensor 2122 (count A panel relay board 3040 on which the detection signal from the sensor 2122a, the count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 is attached to the game board 4, and the main control I / O port 4100b It is supposed to be input through.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby a common part product drive mechanism 2114 via the panel relay board 3040, Outputs drive signals to attacker drive mechanism 2121, winning opening distribution drive motor 2558, and specified area distribution drive motor 2559, or through main control I / O port 4100 b, panel relay board 3040, and function display board 1191. First special symbol indicator 1185, second special symbol indicator 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, gaming status indicator And a drive signal to the round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls performs payout control by the payout control unit 4111 which performs various control related to payout and the firing solenoid 654, and An emission control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and an award ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111 b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b, or a command for indicating the state of pachinko game 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the entrance of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the rental ball unit substrate 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 It is input to the CR unit 6 via the interface. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the ball unit substrate 366, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[Release control unit]
The launch control unit 4120 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is, as shown in FIG. 118, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and the firing A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 for detecting whether the handle main body 504 is touched by a palm or finger and a detection stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball by the intention of the player. Is input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the handle main body 504 first receives the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880 Are input to the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d is based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 to drive the driving current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with the launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504. Is output to the firing solenoid 654 when it is input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see) 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 118, performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041, or the game board A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in 4 In order to transmit to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal The light emission data is transmitted from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the liquid crystal display 1900 or the second liquid crystal display A control signal (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( The sound command is output to the sound source IC 4140 c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various rendering units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a through a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is done. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 It controls so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed such that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 or motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 are door frames via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received light on / off signal based on the received door frame side light on / off command. Output to the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or based on the received game board side light blink command, the lighting signal or blinking signal is It outputs to LED of each decoration board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3124, 3115, 3123, 324, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped. In addition, a panel relay substrate 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is a dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3324, 3304, 4360, 3476, 3508 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped, each solenoid, etc. FIG.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the motor drive board 3045, etc. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through 882 or the rear surface of the back box 3010 Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to the lower bass speaker 821 Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise generation]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various sound facilities, and equipment requiring power such as LEDs and sensors, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speakers 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker (FIG. 89) and connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 to amplify the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and output it to each speaker An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  Also, on the door frame base substrate 194, the wires that connect various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. with the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, etc. It is connected to the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 67, FIG. 89). In addition, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered by the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, at the location (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the winning ball unit 700 or into the game area 1100 despite being fired by the ball striking device 650. A far cover unit 540 (a molded article of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding the game balls (fall balls) not reached to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided close to each other (FIG. 23).

  In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, since game balls (metals) pass at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and may reach 10 several kV Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, the charges accumulated in the resin, even if grounded, are only removed from the very periphery, and most of them remain.

  Then, the digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge. In this case, an abnormal audio signal continuing for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal by the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. In such a case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattle may be generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker may be a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound may be generated), which may make the player uncomfortable. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually absent on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) which blocks an abnormal sound signal so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As for voice output, as described above, peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc., and receives various commands from main control board 4100. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d is output to the sound source IC 4140 c (FIG. 118).

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided at the lower portion of the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194 etc. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base substrate 194 provided in the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected by the wiring 196 and the periphery from the door frame base substrate 194 A +24 V voltage and a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 120, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, a ground signal, a +24 V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821 outputted from the door frame base board 194. The signal is relayed and output through the speaker protection harness 883 to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884.

  Further, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821 and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. It is done. As described above, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, as for the arrangement place of the abnormal sound signal interception board 884 in main part frame 3, it is desirable that it is a place which is hard to receive the influence of static electricity noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location distant from the far cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 in a portion that is less susceptible to the influence of electrostatic noise, input of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 can be stably suppressed.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 detects whether the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal, and is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is blocked so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal speech signal blocking substrate 884 detects an abnormal speech signal from the abnormal speech signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal, and an abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885 from the abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 is provided to cut off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when the output abnormality detection signal is received.

  The +24 V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the +24 V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. Also, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884.

  The woofer + signal which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

  Also, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. , And is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge form, a resistor SR1 (47 k.OMEGA.) Disposed in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, An infrared LED mainly composed of a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal out of two is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branched is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to constitute a rectification bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a + voltage line 890 for supplying the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the rear stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the rectifier bridge to the rear stage. The circuit is connected to a 0V line 891 which supplies 0V whose negative portion has been cut and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectification bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (+ voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain, and the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of + voltage to 0 V The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at a stage subsequent to the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, ripples of the waveform of the positive voltage are removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 after the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal, that is, + voltage is applied after rectification. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to a connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6 The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of a resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 appearing based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at the latter stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the transistor STR3, and the relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of photocoupler SPC1, and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1. It is done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  The base terminal of the relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the 3rd terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL 1 is connected to the ground line 887. Furthermore, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Are connected to an external lower speaker 821.

  Furthermore, varistor SZNR1 for induced current bypass by self-induction function is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of relay SRL1, and relay serial number 5 of relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Incidentally, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC 1, no electrical noise enters the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 directly. It is supposed to be.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with different peak amplitude) is input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of the woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct. In FIG. 120, current flows from top to bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in a period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the positive voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, from 0 V to the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the + voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  As described above, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also maintain the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not substantially turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 is maintained in the off state, and the transistor STR3 is also maintained in the off state. Also, the relay SRL1 is in the inactive state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excitation state, and the non-operation B contact (the contact is closed) between the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, and the non-operation between the third terminal and the fourth terminal. A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL 1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal continues for a fixed period of time]
[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode As SD3 conducts, charging current flows from the top to the bottom to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, a rise in voltage of the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in charge accumulated in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is applied. It will approach a constant voltage and reach the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4) The current flows through the resistor SR5, the zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0 V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing to the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside relay SRL1 between the No. terminal and the terminal is energized, and relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact between the fifth and sixth terminals of relay SRL1 in the operating state (the contact is open), and between the third and fourth terminals in the operating state. A contact (contact closed). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are switched to the disconnection state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted in the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  The third and fourth terminals of relay SRL1 are brought into conduction, the third terminal of relay SRL1 is pulled to ground, and the collector terminal of transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of relay SRL1 is grounded. The transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal and the ground line 887 The current flows to the conductive state, and the conductive state of the coil is maintained. Thus, the woofer + signal remains disconnected from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1.

  As described above, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above embodiment, when abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is maintained by blocking the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority given to preventing damage to the speakers. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal can be grasped by a person in charge or the sound output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL 1 is canceled by turning on the game machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the proper amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 become conductive, charging current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V to the peak voltage of the waveform of + voltage. Be done.

  Also, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in FIG. 120 through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, During the period up to the peak voltage, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely high compared to the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the mountain waveform is the same for the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 The charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the through, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises to reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when an abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, when photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, transistor STR3 is turned on and transistor STR3 is turned on, whereby relay SRL1 is activated and terminals 5 and 6 of relay SRL1 are cut off. In the state, the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted at the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of an abnormal sound due to an abnormal sound signal of an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making unpleasant sounds.

[Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs A screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for displaying and controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above The character ROM 4150 d stores various data, and the character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to The drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b is, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control substrate 4010, A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, in the case of displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each person is referred to as "sprite". Thus, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap are set, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device It is drawn to 3252.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and sequentially intersect with the one direction along the pixels as viewed from the front and from left to right. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction of When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning, And sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of a minute, the image is output as pixels in one line sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing on the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 149, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board of the present embodiment. When the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is it a set value at the time of a power failure) or not. For example, it executes processing (return processing at power failure) to return to the state at the time of power failure according to the backup data stored in RAM, clears the RAM if backup data is abnormal, and performs device setting around CPU (normal initialization , Setting of interrupt timing, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is turned on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to a transmittable state to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the gaming state when the power is shut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is stored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is performed.

  When the power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each game process. At the start of the loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S2). In the present embodiment, the power supply voltage used by the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply substrate. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply substrate. It is supplied to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply substrate falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate to the main control substrate 4100 is stopped. Will be sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power failure notification signal in step S2, the power off occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

  When the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply substrate after power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the processing at the time of power failure occurs from the state before the power failure. In order to start, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the process contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3).

[Process on power off]
FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of power-off occurrence processing of this embodiment. The power failure occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main process.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM before the power failure is held at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a specified value indicating that the processing upon power failure has been performed (step S4c). When the above process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply. It should be noted that in this process, in the case where the process at the time of a power failure has been started by the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, it may not be possible to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but the processing upon power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure occurs, processing is initiated by a momentary power failure, and even if an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment).

  After the main control MPU 4100a first executes register save processing (step S10), the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number updating process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command instructing payout of a game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In addition, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display 1185 or 1186 based on the progressing state of the game, or the special electric character (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121). Controls the opening / closing member 2106 for opening / closing the special winning opening 2103, and executes processing of changing the opening / closing state of the special winning opening 2103 or the like.

  In step S15, the normal control process including the lottery process according to the normal hit which triggers the operation of the movable piece 2111 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2111 becomes higher when a specific condition (the ON / OFF flag) is satisfied after the big hit gaming state ends. Is configured to execute (so-called short time game state). In this embodiment, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and this is set as a long time as the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates. Thus, the time-saving gaming state is realized by facilitating the reception of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 more than the normal state (non-time-saving gaming state).

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1, a drive signal is output to a special view start storage indicator (not shown) To perform the process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting a rendering command to the surrounding control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission processing, processing of transmitting the power on command set in the power on processing (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processes from step S11 to step S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In the present embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for the determination (whether it is a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery) to generate the jackpot gaming state is generated a jackpot gaming state in the jackpot judgment A random number for the big hit symbol used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be made, a determination whether to generate the small hit gaming state instead of the big hit (also called small hit determination, small hit lottery ) Random number for small hit judgment used for small hit, random number for big hit symbol used to decide stop symbol of special symbol when it is decided to generate small hit gaming state in small hit decision, big hit lottery and small hit Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high expectation rendering such as reach rendering when it is determined that the player is not hit by lottery. Variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the separate symbol display 1185, 1186, big hit (small hit) gaming (special bonus) A random number for round determination used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds etc.) of the special winning opening 2103 in the game), the movable piece 2111 for opening and closing the special opening 2101b is opened (upper end is clockwise around the lower end) There are a normal hit determination random number and the like used for determining whether or not to control to a position where it is rotated (normally determined per lottery).

  In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is also used to determine the jackpot state type (such as whether or not to operate the time saving function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot was won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number updating process 1, the big hit (small hit) judging random number, the big hit (small hit) symbol random number, the round deciding random number, and the movable piece 2111 in the big hit (small hit) lottery are opened. Update the random number per standard symbol judgment related to whether or not to control to. That is, the random number used for the determination regarding the opening and closing control of the big hit (small hit) lottery and the movable piece 2111 is updated as a predetermined timing every 4 ms. By doing this, the probability in a predetermined period with each random number (the probability of determining that a big hit (small hit) gaming state is generated, the probability of determining that the movable piece 2111 is controlled to be open) is made constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, update of reach determination random numbers, fluctuation display pattern random numbers and the like not related to the big hit (small hit) lottery and the normal lottery is performed.

[Special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process of the present embodiment.

  In this special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processes, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, for example. The second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled after the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110) is performed, and the first special symbol processing process A first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progression of the game on the symbol side is controlled is sequentially performed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed, As a result, even if the symbol variation on one side is started, the symbol variation on the other side is not started to be started.

[First and second starting opening winning process]
Next, first and second starting opening winning processing (processing of step S110) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting hole winning processing of the present embodiment.

  In the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110), the processing related to the determination of whether or not the game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 is largely considered, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there has been a process of updating the holding status of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random number for big hit judgment, big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) A determination is made as to whether the value of the hold number counter is less than 1 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second pending number counter is less than 1 (the second pending number counter is 0), the second start pending storage process (step S203) and the pending history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbols) obtained by the game ball winning in the second start opening 2102 as a second start pending storage process (step S203). The random numbers and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S204).

  In the process of step S203, a prize notification command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays a hold display on the second start port 2102 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output in the process of step S201, or the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value in the process of step S202. If it is determined that the value is 1, then it is determined as to whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131 as the process of step S205. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (YES in step S205). The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit judgment random numbers, big hit random numbers for the first start reservation storage process (step S207), obtained by the game ball winning the first start opening 2101 Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S208).

  In the process of step S207, too, a prize notification command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, even when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like makes a hold display on the first starting port 2101 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that 4 has been reached, at this time, the first and second starting opening winning process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) to the second starting port 2102 is performed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) to the first starting port 2101 is performed. . However, instead of this, it may be possible to execute the winning process for the second starting port 2102 after performing the winning process for the first starting port 2101.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a may execute an advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a prize notification command. The precedent determination process is performed prior to a lottery using random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of a big hit lottery, a probability variation lottery, and a change display pattern described later), and a process of determining the lottery result in advance It is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the precedent determination processing, the lottery result (big hit (small hit)), the type of the big hit, and the variation display pattern when the lottery using the random number is performed by comparing the random number with the prior determination table. Etc.) (A determination made in advance of the lottery in this manner is also called a "prefetch determination"). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before a lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect may be Also referred to as

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the advance determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progression of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled (step S14a) and the second special symbol control process in which the progression of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled (step S14b) Each detailed procedure about and is explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, unlike the execution procedure of control, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-described first and second starting opening winning process (FIG. 125) and the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later are executed in the above-mentioned special control process (FIG. 124) It is a process to be executed later.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the interlocking flag on the first special symbol side is in the on state (step S100a). The interlocking flag of the first special symbol is a flag set to ON when the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can simultaneously proceed. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) will occur redundantly between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. In order to avoid, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, the interlock flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is to be controlled regardless of the processing flag is operated in the on state. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

  When the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S100a), main control MPU 4100a does not perform processing (step S130a to step S200a) according to the first processing flag, and (1) The interlock setting process is executed (step S250a). Details of the first interlocked setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is in the OFF state in the process of step S100a, the main control MPU 4100a is the original game of the first special symbol side (NO in step S100a). Assuming that the game situation is permitted to proceed, the state of the first processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a selectively selects a process according to the state of the first process flag (the progress of the game on the first special symbol side) among the plurality of processes (steps S130a to S200a) shown in the figure. Since the game is executed, the game on the first special symbol side will be properly progressed.

  More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a), and if the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), 1 Change start processing (step S130a) is executed. In the first variation start process (step S130a), after the setting for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special determination), etc., the first change is made. The 1 process flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 1 or not (step S140a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is executed. In this first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 (the first special symbol (identification in the first special symbol indicator 1185) After the fluctuation time from starting of the fluctuation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined, etc., the first processing flag is updated to "2".

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 2 or not (step S160a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first variation processing (step S170a) is executed. In this first variation processing, the variation time set in the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and the first special symbol display in the first special symbol display 1185 is based on time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. And after this, when it is determined that the first variation start process (step S130a) has won the big hit, the interlocking flag for interlocking the game of the second special symbol side to the game of the first special symbol side After turning on, the first processing flag is updated to "3" to start the big hit game. However, if the win is not won (loss), the first processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the first variation start process (step S130a) will be performed again.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 3 or not (step S180a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), the first big hit game start processing (step S190a) is executed to create an interval period before starting the big hit game. In addition, when the interval period before starting the big hit game has passed, the first processing flag is updated to “4” in the first big hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes a first big hit game start process (step S200a). In the first big hit game start process, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the first big hit gaming process (step S200a), assuming that the first processing flag is 4. In this first big hit game processing, the big hit game mode (round number, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the open / close operation on the open / close member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. . In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the first variation start process (step S130a) will be performed again.

  As described above, in the process of step S100a, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is in the OFF state, the step When any of S130a, S150a, S170a, S190a, and S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first process flag, the first special control process in the interrupt process is executed. It is finished.

  Hereinafter, the first change start process (step S130a), the first change pattern setting process (step S150a), the first change process (step S170a), the first big hit game start process (step S190a), the first big hit game process (step S190a) The detailed procedures of the process of step S200a) and the first interlocked setting process (step S250a) will be described separately.

[First change start process]
First, the first variation start process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of first variation start processing according to this embodiment. The first variation start process is executed when the first processing flag is "0" in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the above first special suspension number counter as the process of step S301a. I do. Then, if it is determined that there is no lottery process of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter (YES in step S301a), within the interrupt process The first variation start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-mentioned interruption processing is performed, it is judged in the processing of the above-mentioned step S301 a whether or not there is lottery processing of the first special symbol in the holding state, and the holding state The progress of the game on the first special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state until it is determined that there is the lottery process of the first special symbol in.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S301a that the main control MPU 4100a determines that there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301a), the next step of step S302a is performed. As a process, it is determined whether the number of times of ST is zero. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) which sets the jackpot probability as the high probability (certainly changed state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later. . In this embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after all the big hit games are over. Details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302a), the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the number of STs and updates it as the process of step S303a. On the other hand, if the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process of step S303a is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304a.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs, as the processing of step S304a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example, the first win The random number group stored in the first storage area among the determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number) is read from the same RAM 4100 e. Next, as the process of step S305a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a The first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

  More specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special suspension number counter as the processing of steps S306a and S307a, and performs lottery processing for the hit based on the read first hit determination random number (the first 1 Make a special symbol lottery).

  Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the jackpot probability state of the jackpot is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the jackpot is won When the probability state is a probability change state (high probability state), it is set to win a big hit with a probability of 1/45.

  Then, when the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as processing of step S308a next. Do. At this time, a stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery is also determined. After that, when the first processing flag is updated to “1” so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) as the process of step S309a, this process is ended.

  It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first variation start process is used as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a described above, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. It will be transmitted to the part 4140.

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, a first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) and the like will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of a first variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has won the big hit. If the flag indicating that is set (YES in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402a), and in the flag state indicating that it is a loss that does not win the big hit If there is any (NO in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S403a).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and the determined variation pattern The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of the start of setting is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the first variation timer (step S406a). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time determined in this way. After that, when the first processing flag is updated to “2” so that the process proceeds to the first variable processing (step S170a) as the processing of step S407a, this processing ends.

  The fluctuation pattern set in the first fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. Be done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

  Among the variation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402a and S403a, the variation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high probability short game state (lash preparation mode) is a liquid crystal display. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time) for exciting display effects in the device 1900 are stored. In these fluctuation patterns, effects (including reach effects) are set which make the degree of expectation to be “winning” different, and in the process of step S 405 a, any fluctuation pattern is selectively determined. It becomes. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used in the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of the setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Process during first change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first variable processing (step S170a) executed when the first processing flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the first during-variation process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the first fluctuation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150a) has become 0 as the process of step S501a, that is, the above setting A determination is made as to whether the time of change has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the first fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first fluctuation processing (step S170a) Every time it is performed, the first fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S 521 a.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the first fluctuation timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501a, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). The main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) already determined as the processing of step S502a and step S503a on the above first special symbol display 1185 By performing the display control for ending the variable display by performing the first determination stop command to instruct the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decoration symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first determined stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  In this way, after performing processing concerning symbol stop, when various processing according to the result of the 1st special symbol lottery are performed, this processing will be ended.

  If the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S 504 a), main control MPU 4100 a avoids the occurrence of overlapping hits on the second special symbol side, the second special symbol side The interlock flag of the above-mentioned second special symbol indicating that the game of the should be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol side is turned on (step S505a). In addition, a probability variation flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a high probability status (probability status) is turned off (step S506a). After that, when the first processing flag is updated to "3" to start the big hit game (step S507a), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the interval until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is turned off (the first big hit game processing (see FIG. 131 described later)). In step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side regardless of the second processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504a), main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the probability change flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is in the ON state or not It judges (step S511 a). The probability change flag is set to the on state when the probability of winning the big hit is shifted from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probable state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in the first jackpot game processing (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the on state (YES in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the number of times of ST is 0 or not (step S512a). If the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S513a).

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511a), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514a. If the number of times of ST is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S512a), the probability change state continues, so the probability change flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S514a. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S514a (step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to ON when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S 725 a) of the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is to be stopped (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the probability changing function triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued when the probability change flag is in the on state.

  That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513a described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516a). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped fluctuating so as to indicate that it is a loss, and the first processing flag is This is updated to “0” (step S 517 a), and this processing ends. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the first special symbol is performed.

[First jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first jackpot game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the first jackpot game start process of the present embodiment.

  At step S601a, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (first big hit start interval timer) that counts an interval before the start of the big hit game has been set. As a result, when the first big hit start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S601a), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602a, and time saving is performed as the process of steps S603a and S604a. If the function is operating (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. That is, after the preparation, the first big hit start interval timer is set and the first big hit interval start command is set as the processing of steps S 605 a and S 606 a to start the big hit game's pre-start interval. , End this process once.

  The first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects in the interval before the start of the big hit game come to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601a every time the interrupt processing is performed ( YES in step S601a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611 a, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed It will be determined whether or not it has been made. Then, in the process of step S611a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611 a Each time the first big hit game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621a.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S611a, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed. When (YES in step S611a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the first processing flag to "4" to execute the big hit game (step S612a), and ends this processing.

  In addition, about the 1st big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[First jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the first big hit game processing (step S200a) executed when the first processing flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the first jackpot gaming process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first big hit game execution flag is in the on state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already in progress, as the process of step S701a. The first big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the process of step S703a described later at the start of the first big hit game, and turned off by the process of step S723a described later It is set.

  Then, when the first big hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S 701 a), the main control MPU 4 100 a performs the process of step S 702 a to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. As, the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum winning number of each round) according to the type of the big hit is set. In addition, the detail about the opening aspect according to the kind of big hit is later mentioned in FIG. 146 (C).

  In this way, after the execution mode of the big hit game is set, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S703a and step S704a, indicates that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in the state of proceeding. When the flag is turned on and the first jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S701a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been digested as the process of the next step S711a. Then, in the process of step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is determined that it is a halfway stage of control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711a The main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set open pattern as the process of step S712a every time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed. Thus, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712a. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an open pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit is realized.

  And, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, it is determined that all the control for the execution of the big hit game has been completed. (YES at step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating the end interval of the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (first big hit end interval timer) for clocking the end interval of the big hit game has already been set (step S721 a). As a result, when the first big hit end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721a), the first big hit end interval is processed as the processing of steps S741a and S742a to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the first big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects during the big hit game end interval appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S 721a each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S721a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first big hit end interval timer is 0 or not, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed, as the processing of the next step S722 a. It will be determined whether or not it has been made. Then, in the process of step S722a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game is not elapsed (NO in step S722 a Each time the first big hit gaming process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts one from the first big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has become 0 in the processing of the step S 722 a, that is, it is determined that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S723a to step S728a) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the first big hit game execution flag in the OFF state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already progressing, as the process of step S723a. Then, next, as the process of step S724a, the number of special symbol lottery in which the probability change flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (positive variation state) is turned on to make the high probability state ( Set ST times to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag operated in the on state is operated to be in the off state when the number of times of ST is digested (step S513a) or when it is a big hit before the digestion (step S506a).

  In the present embodiment, although the probability changing function is activated for all the big hits, when the probability changing function is not activated or not according to the type of the big hit, the time saving function setting process described later (step S725a) As described above, first, processing may be performed to determine whether or not the jackpot to activate the probability change function. Then, when it is a big hit to operate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the on state similarly to the process of the above-described step S724a, and sets the ST number. Further, in the case of a big hit to operate the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only has to set the probability changing flag to the ON state and does not set the ST number.

  Next, in step S725a, the main control MPU 4100a executes time-saving function setting processing to set whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the game state. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  And, after processing concerning the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a, in view of the possibility that the big hit game will occur redundantly on the second special symbol side is no longer, the second special symbol side The above-mentioned interlocking flag which shows that it is in the state which should interlock a game of 1st with a game of a 1st special symbol is made into an OFF state (step S726a). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S 727 a), and the first processing flag is updated to “0” (step S 728 a), as the first special symbol that became the big hit this time is in the processing stage that has been detained. ), End this process. Thereby, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the first special symbol is performed.

  According to such a big hit game processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum round number in the processing of step 711a, the corresponding big winning opening 2103 is an opening mode (according to the type of the big hit ( After step S712a), the player can be released repeatedly, and the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[Time saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S 725 a) of the above-described first big hit gaming process (FIG. 131) will be described based on FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving function setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time saving function according to the type of the big hit (step S751). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146C described later, the time saving function is provided only when the big hit (first big hit A) of the symbol A is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Then, if it is a big hit to operate the time saving function (YES in step S751), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752). The rush mode in this embodiment indicates a gaming state in which the probability changing function is activated and the time saving function is not activated (high probability non-time gaming state). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether the probability change flag is in the on state and the time saving flag is in the off state.

  When the current game mode is not the rush mode (high probability non-short game state) (NO in step S752), main control MPU 4100a operates the short time flag ON to activate the short time function (step S753). . Thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the present big hit is not a big hit for activating the time saving function (NO in step S751), the main control MPU 4100a ends the present processing without operating the time saving flag. In addition, even when the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-time game state) (YES in step S752), the time saving flag is not operated. This process ends. Here, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the above-mentioned first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130).

  Therefore, if the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the short function, It will not be activated. In the present embodiment, a game state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a game state (a rush preparation mode) in which the time short function is activated by not activating the time short function that is generally advantageous to the player is provided. It is characterized by

[First interlock setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a) of the above-mentioned first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment.

  In the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the second special symbol side.

  Main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a).

  Then, when the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002a).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 (step S1003a). Further, a first decision stop command instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a) . The processes in steps S1003a and S1004a are the same as steps S502a and S503a which are performed when the variation time is up in the above-described first variation-in-progress process (FIG. 129).

  Subsequently, main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the above-mentioned first variation in processing (FIG. 129) by the processing of steps S1005a to S1011a. After execution, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of first special symbol (that is, the first special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021a), and the process ends.

  Thus, in the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived due to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the first interlocking flag is in the on state), the first special symbol in fluctuation is compulsorily forced Stop with a lost design. In addition, the first special symbol which is not changing is made to be in a standby state not to start changing until the first interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is avoided that a hit overlaps between the game of the 1st special symbol side, and the game of the 2nd special symbol side.

  In the present embodiment, the first interlocking flag is set to ON at the end of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the process of step S505b of the second in-divergence process (FIG. 137), and the first interlocking setting process is performed. Although the stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) is changed to the untouched pattern, the present invention is not limited thereto. The first interlocking flag may be set to ON at the timing when the variation starts according to the gaming state. For example, in the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), the first interlocking flag is turned on when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the hit determination process (step S307 b) of the second change start process (FIG. 135) Make settings. Then, when the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the variation in which the second jackpot is derived, no lottery is performed without using the first hit determination random number. You may make it determine an out pattern. As a result, since the shift symbol is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived, the processing at the end timing of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is simplified can do.

  Further, as a modification of the first interlocked setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state may be created in which the fluctuation state is maintained even when the first special symbol is in fluctuation. In this way, when the big hit is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol side, it is forcibly controlled by the loss, and the player loses the winning opportunity of the first big hit that should be originally obtained. It disappears.

  Next, each detailed procedure of the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142.

  In addition, about a 2nd special symbol control processing, you may make it carry out by changing the various values referred within this program using the same program as the case where the above-mentioned 1st special symbol control processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the interlocking flag on the second special symbol side is in the on state (step S100b). The interlock flag of the second special symbol is a flag that is set to the on state when the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can proceed simultaneously. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) will occur redundantly between the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game, so avoid this. In order to obtain a big hit (small hit) in the game on one side, at that time, the interlock flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is to be controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. ing. Here, the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

  When the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S100 b), main control MPU 4100 a does not perform any process (step S130 b to step S240 b) according to the second processing flag. The second interlock setting process is executed (step S250 b). Details of the second interlocking setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the OFF state in the process of step S100b, the main control MPU 4100a originally intended the game of the second special symbol side (NO in step S100b). Assuming that the game situation is allowed to progress, the state of the second processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing that matches the state of the second processing flag (the progress status of the game on the second special symbol side) among the plurality of processing (steps S130b to S240b) shown in the figure. By selectively executing the game, the game on the second special symbol side will be properly advanced.

  More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b), and if the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), 2) Perform change start processing (step S130 b). In this second variation start process (step S130 b), after setting for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special determination), etc., The second processing flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In this second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1186 (the second special symbol (identification in the second special symbol indicator 1186) The second processing flag is updated to "2" after the fluctuation time, etc., from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second processing flag is 2 or not (step S160b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second variation processing (step S170b) is executed. In this second variation process, the variation time set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 is Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined that the big hit is won in the second change start process (step S130b), the interlock flag for interlocking the game of the first special symbol side to the game of the second special symbol side After the on state, the second processing flag is updated to "3" to start the big hit game. Also, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, similarly the interlocking lag for interlocking the game of the first special symbol side to the game of the second special symbol side is turned on, and the small hit game is started. The second processing flag is updated to "5" in order to make it happen. However, if the small hit and the big hit have not been won (loss), the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the present fluctuation ends, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130 b) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second processing flag is 3 or not (step S180 b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In the second big hit game start processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second processing flag is 4 or not (step S200 b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second big hit game processing, the big hit game mode (round number, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the open / close operation on the open / close member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. As a result, the present fluctuation ends, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130 b) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second processing flag is 5 or not (step S220 b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), a second small hit game start process (step S230b) is executed to create an interval period before starting the small hit game. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the second processing flag is updated to “6” in the second small hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, when the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220 b), the main control MPU 4100 a executes the second small hitting game processing (step S240 b), assuming that the second processing flag is 6. In the second small hit game process, a small hit game in which the opening and closing member 2106 is operated to open and close in a control mode corresponding to the type of the small hit is performed. In addition, when the small hitting game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the present fluctuation ends, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130 b) is executed.

  As described above, in the process of step S100b, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the OFF state, the step When any of the processes of S130b, Step S150b, Step S170b, Step S190b, Step S210b, Step S230b, and Step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second processing flag, within the interrupt processing The second special control process is ended.

  Hereinafter, the second change start process (step S130b), the second change pattern setting process (step S150b), the second change process (step S170b), the second big hit game start process (step S190b), the second big hit game process (step S190b) The detailed procedures of step S210 b), second small hit game start process (step S230 b), second small hit game process (step S240 b), and the second interlock setting process (step S250 b) will be described separately. Each will be described.

[Second variation start process]
First, the second change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second change start process according to this embodiment. The second variation start process is executed when the second process flag is “0” in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter as the process of step S301 b. Then, if it is determined that there is no lottery process of the second special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the second special suspension number counter (YES in step S301 b), within the interrupt process The second variation start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-mentioned interruption processing is performed, it is judged in the processing of the above-mentioned step S301 b whether or not there is lottery processing of the second special symbol in the holding state, and the holding state The progress of the game on the second special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state until it is determined that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S301b that the main control MPU 4100a determines that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301b), next, in step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether the number of times of ST is zero. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) in which the jackpot probability is a high probability (probability change state) and is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later. . In this embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after all the big hit games are over. Details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the number of times of ST is not 0 (NO in step S302 b), the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the number of times of ST as a process of step S303b and updates. On the other hand, if the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S302 b), the process of step S303 b is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304 b.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs, as the processing of step S304 b, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a The random number group stored in the first storage area among the determination random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) is read from the same RAM 4100 e. Next, as the process of step S305 b, a random number group (random number for second winning judgment) related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) are shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

  More specifically, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become. In the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) of the second special symbol hold storage area is effective. That is, in the variable display control of the second special symbol of this embodiment, as long as the second special symbol corresponding to the start winning combination generated earlier is not finished changing, the random number extracted according to the starting winning combination generated later is stored. It will not be done.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special hold number counter as the processing of steps S306b and S307b, and performs lottery processing for the above hit based on the read second hit judgment random number 2) Make a special symbol lottery).

  Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is a definite variation In the case of the state (high probability state), the jackpot is set to be won with a probability of 1/45. Also, when the probability of winning is normal, the player wins a small hit with probability 390/399, and when the probability of winning is a positive state (high probability), it wins with a probability of 44/45. It is set.

  Then, when the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as processing of step S308b next. Do. At this time, a stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery is also determined. After that, when the second processing flag is updated to “1” so that the process proceeds to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150 b) as the process of step S309 b, this process is ended.

  It should be noted that the result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second change start process is used as the winning information command set in the process of step S308b, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. It will be transmitted to the part 4140.

[Second variation pattern setting process]
Next, the second variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a second variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second processing flag is “1” in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  If the flag indicating that the big hit has been won is set (YES in step S401b), main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table for the big hit according to the game state (step S402b), and wins the small hit If the flag indicating that it has been set is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table for small hitting according to the game state is selected (step S404b), and there is neither a big hit nor a small hit. If it is a flag state indicating that (NO in step S403b), a fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S405b).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and the determined variation pattern Of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is started (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the second variation timer (step S408b). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed in the second special symbol display 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time thus determined. After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "2" so that the process proceeds to the second in-divergence process (step S170b) as the process of step S409b, this process is ended.

  The fluctuation pattern set in the second fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. Be done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small hit lottery) based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. The display effect is performed as indicated by.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side are simultaneously advanced, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 Through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, the display effect (variation of the decoration symbol etc.) on the first special symbol side and the display effect (variation of the decoration symbol etc) on the second special symbol side simultaneously appear .

  In the fluctuation pattern table used in the process of steps S402b, S404b and S405b, the fluctuation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high probability short game state (lash preparation mode), A variation time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length ten times or more longer than any other variation time selectable on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used in the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Process during second change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the second variation processing (step S170b) executed when the second processing flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the second in-transition processing of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines, as the process of step S501b, whether or not the second fluctuation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150b) has become 0, ie, the above setting A determination is made as to whether the time of change has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the second fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) Every time it is performed, the second fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521 b.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, when it is determined that the second fluctuation timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501b, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). The main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) already determined on the second special symbol display 1186 as the processing of step S502 b and step S503 b. By performing a display control for ending the variable display by performing the second determination stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decoration symbol according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The second determined stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  In this way, after performing processing concerning symbol stop, when various processing according to the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery are performed, this processing will be ended.

  When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S 504 b), main control MPU 4100 a prevents the occurrence of overlapping hits on the first special symbol side, and thus the first special symbol side The interlock flag of the above-mentioned first special symbol indicating that the game of II should be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol side is turned on (step S505 b). Further, a probability variation flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the high probability status (probability status) is turned off (step S506 b). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b, YES in step S531b), first, overlapping hits on the first special symbol side In order to avoid occurrence, the interlock flag of the first special symbol is turned on to indicate that the game of the first special symbol should be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol (step S532b). ). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "5" to start the small hit game (step S533b), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the interval until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game processing (FIG. 139 described later)). In step S 726 b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the second special symbol side regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S 504 b and NO in step S 531 b), main control MPU 4100 a first turns on the probability change flag provided in RAM 4100 e of main control board 4100 It is determined whether or not (step S511 b). The probability change flag is set to the on state when the probability of winning the big hit is shifted from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probable state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in the second jackpot game processing (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the on state (YES in step S511 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the number of times of ST is 0 or not (step S512 b). If the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the positive variation state has ended, and the positive variation flag is set to the off state (step S513b).

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511 b), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514b. If the number of times of ST is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S512b), the probability change state continues, so the probability change flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S514b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S514 b (step S514 b). Specifically, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to ON when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S 725 b) of the second big hit gaming process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514 b), main control MPU 4100 a determines whether to stop the time saving function (step S515 b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the probability changing function triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued when the probability change flag is in the on state.

  That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513b described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516b). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped fluctuating so as to indicate that it is a loss, and the second processing flag is This is updated to “0” (step S 517 b), and this processing ends. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next change concerning the 2nd special symbol will be performed.

[Second jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) executed when the second processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the second jackpot game start process of the present embodiment.

  At step S601b, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (second big hit start interval timer) that counts an interval before the start of the big hit game has already been set. As a result, when the second big hit start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S601b), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602b, and time saving is performed as the process of steps S603b and S604b. If the function is operating (YES in step S603 b), the operation is stopped. That is, when such preparation is completed, the second jackpot start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S605b and S606b, and the second jackpot interval start command is set, to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game. This process will end once.

  Note that the second jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects in the interval before the start of the big hit game come to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the second big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of the step S601 b every time the interrupt processing is performed ( YES in step S601b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second big hit start interval timer is 0 or not in the process of the next step S611 b, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed It will be determined whether or not it has been made. Then, in the process of step S611b, as long as it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game is not elapsed (NO in step S611 b Each time the second big hit game start process (step S190b) is performed, the second big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621b.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S611 b, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned big hit game start interval has elapsed. When (YES in step S611b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing when the second processing flag is updated to "4" to execute the big hit game (step S612b).

  In addition, about a 2nd big hit start interval timer, time length can be set according to the kind (type decided by 2nd symbol random number) of big hit symbols.

[Second jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the second big hit game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the second big hit game process of this embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second big hit game execution flag is in the on state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already progressing, as the process of step S701 b. The second big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the processing of step S703b described later at the start of the second big hit game, and turned off by the processing of step S723b described later It is set.

  Then, when the second big hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S 701 b), main control MPU 4100 a performs the process of step S 702 b to start control related to the execution of the big hit game using attacker device 2100. As, the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum winning number of each round) according to the type of the big hit is set. In addition, the detail about the opening aspect according to the kind of big hit is later mentioned in FIG. 146 (C).

  In this way, after the execution mode of the big hit game is set, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S703b and step S704b, indicates that the control related to the execution of the big hit game has already progressed, the second big hit game execution When the flag is turned on and the second jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S701 b), the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the set number of rounds has been digested, as processing of the next step S711 b. Then, in the process of step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is determined that it is a halfway stage of control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711b Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set open pattern as the process of step S712b. Thus, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712 b. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an open pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit is realized.

  And, while the control is being performed, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been digested in the process of step S711b, that is, it is determined that all the control for the execution of the big hit game is completed. (YES at step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating the end interval of the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (second big hit end interval timer) for counting the end interval of the big hit game has been set (step S721 b). As a result, when the second big hit end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721 b), the second big hit end interval is processed as the processing of steps S741 b and S742 b to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the second big hit interval end command is set, this process is once ended.

  The second big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the periphery control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, display effects during the big hit game end interval appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the second big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S 721 b whenever the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S721 b), the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the second big hit end interval timer is 0 or not in the process of the next step S 722 b, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. It will be judged whether or not. Then, in the process of step S722b, as long as it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722 b Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts one from the second big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer has become 0 in the processing of step S722b, that is, it is determined that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S723b to step S728b) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the second big hit game execution flag in the OFF state, which indicates that the control related to the big hit game is already progressing, as the processing of step S723b. Then, next, as the process of step S 724 b, the number of special symbol lottery in which the probability flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the high probability state (probability state) is turned on to make the high probability state ( Set ST times to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag operated in the on state is operated to be in the off state when the number of times of ST is digested (step S513 b) or when it is a big hit before the digestion (step S506 b).

  In the present embodiment, although the probability changing function is operated for all the big hits, when the probability changing function is not activated or not according to the type of the big hit, a time saving function setting process described later (step S725 b) As described above, first, processing may be performed to determine whether or not the jackpot to activate the probability change function. Then, in the case of a big hit to operate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the on state similarly to the processing of the above-described step S724b, and sets the ST number. Further, in the case of a big hit to operate the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only has to set the probability changing flag to the ON state and does not set the ST number.

  Next, at step S725b, the main control MPU 4100a executes time-saving function setting processing to set whether to activate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the game state. Note that the time saving function setting process is the same process as the time saving function setting process (step S 725 a) in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described above, and is as described above in FIG. 132.

  And, after the processing concerning the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a is the first special symbol side in view of the possibility that the big hit game will be generated redundantly on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag which shows that it is in the state which should interlock a game of 2nd with the game of 2nd special symbol is made into an OFF state (Step S726 b). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S 727 b), and the second processing flag is updated to “0” because the second special symbol that has become the big hit this time is in the processing stage that has been reserve-digested S728b), end this process. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next change concerning the 2nd special symbol will be performed.

  According to such a big hit game processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum round number in the processing of step 711b, the corresponding big winning opening 2103 is an opening mode (according to the type of the big hit ( After step S 712 b), the player can be released repeatedly, and the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[Second small hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hit game start processing (step S230b) executed when the second processing flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the second small hit game start processing of this embodiment.

  At step S801 b, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a timer (second small hit start interval timer) for measuring the interval before the start of the small hit game has already been set. As a result, when the second small hit start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S801 b), the second small hit process is started as the process before steps S802 b and S803 b. This process is temporarily ended when the small hit start interval timer is set and the second small hit interval start command is set.

  The second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect in the interval before the start of the small hitting game comes to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second small hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is judged that the second small hit start interval timer has been set each time the interrupt processing is performed (YES in step S801 b). ), The main control MPU 4100a, in the processing of the next step S811b, the determination about whether or not the time set as the second small hit start interval timer is 0, ie, the interval before the start of the small hit game has passed. It will be done. Then, in the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the above-mentioned small hit game start interval has not elapsed (in step S811b Every time the second small hit game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small hit start interval timer is decremented by one as the process of step S821b.

  Then, as a result of such processing being performed, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has become 0 in the process of step S811b, that is, the time set as the interval before the small hit game has elapsed. When the main control MPU 4100a updates the second processing flag to "6" (step S812b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing (YES in step S811b).

[Second small hit game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the second small hit game process (step S240 b) executed when the second process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the second small hit gaming process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second small hit game execution flag is in the on state, which indicates that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S901 b. Do. The second small hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control board 4100, and is set to the on state by the process of step S903 b described later at the start of the second small hit game, and turned off by the process of step S921 b described later Set to state.

  Then, when the second small hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S901 b), main control MPU 4100 a starts step S902 b in order to start the control related to the small hit game execution using attacker device 2100. As the process of (4), an open mode (open pattern) according to the type of small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required to execute control concerning the open pattern are set. In addition, the small hit in this embodiment is one type. The details of the small hit opening mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (D).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a operates the second small hit game execution flag in the ON state, which indicates that the control for the execution of the small hit game is already in progress as the processing of step S903 b and step S904 b. When the second small hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the small hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed. (YES in step S901 b), the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether or not the control timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S911 b, that is, the timing for the control to execute the small hit game has come The decision of Then, in the process of step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, the halfway stage of the control concerning the execution of the small hit game (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Every time the game processing (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes open / close control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set open pattern as the process of step S912b. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912b, and the small hit where the attacker device 2100 opens and closes. A game will be realized.

  When the control timer is 0 in the process of step S911b, that is, it is determined that all the controls for the small hit game have been completed (step S911b). The main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for ending the small hit game.

  As the processing of step S921b, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the second small hit game execution flag to the OFF state, which indicates that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress. Next, considering that there is no possibility that the big hit game will be generated redundantly on the first special symbol side, that the game on the first special symbol side should be linked to the second special symbol game. The interlock flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922 b).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100 a determines whether the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100 e of the main control substrate 4100 is in the on state (step S 923 b). If the probability change flag is in the on state (YES in step S 923 b), it is determined whether the number of times of ST is 0 (step S 924 b). If the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S925b).

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S923 b), the main control MPU 4100 a shifts to the process of step S926 b. If the number of times of ST is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S924 b), the probability change state continues, so the probability change flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S926 b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S926b. Then, if the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S926 b), it is determined whether the time saving function is to be stopped (step S927 b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the probability changing function triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued when the probability change flag is in the on state.

  That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S925b described above, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S928b). Then, after the processing concerning the probability change function and the time reduction function is performed, the second processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the special symbol from which the small hit is derived is in the processing stage that has been reserve-digested (step S929b). End this process. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next change concerning the 2nd special symbol will be performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) of the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second interlocking setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the first special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the second special symbol is changing (step S1001 b).

  Then, when the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001 b), main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the second special symbol lottery (step S307 b) of the second change start process (FIG. 135) The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002 b).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). Further, a second determination stop command instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b) . The processing in steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as steps S502b and S503b which are performed when the variation time is up in the above-described second variation-in-progress processing (FIG. 137).

  Subsequently, main control MPU 4100a performs the same process as the process of steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-mentioned second variation in process (FIG. 137) by the process of steps S1005b to S1011b. After execution, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001 b), main control MPU 4100a continues the current second special symbol state (that is, the second special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021b), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is in the on state), the second special symbol during fluctuation is forcibly lost symbol Stop at. In addition, the second special symbol which is not changing is made to be in a standby state not to start changing until the second interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is avoided that a hit overlaps between the game of the 2nd special symbol side, and the game of the 1st special symbol side.

[Process of normal pattern side]
Subsequently, the normal control process (step S15) of the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the normal control process, normal symbol variation control (normal symbol lottery) based on the passage of gaming balls of the common view gate 2301 is executed, and a movable piece (normally generated) occurs in the normal symbol lottery. A winning assistance control is performed to operate the electric winning combination) 2111 to facilitate winning of the gaming ball in the special prize winning opening 2101b.

Normal control processing
FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the ordinary control process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the gate sensor 2302 for detecting passage of the game ball to the common gate 2301 is in the on state (step S2001). When the gate sensor 2302 detects passage of the game ball to the common gate 2301 and is in the on state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a selects the normal random number of the normal symbol as the random number counter. And gate pass processing such as storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM and the like (step S2010). The details of the gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a is one of five process processing (normal symbol normal processing, normal symbol variation time determination processing, normal symbol variation processing, normal symbol stop processing, common electric character opening processing) according to the normal symbol process flag. Selectively execute one to end normal control processing.

  First, in the normal symbol normal processing in step S2100, the main control MPU 4100a reads out the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the read out normal random number, the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol. Execute lottery processing and the like.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation time determination process in step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs lottery processing etc. for the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the common pattern variation random number. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation process of step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.

  Next, in the normal symbol stop processing in step S2400, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the change control stop of the normal symbol is normal A process of stopping the variation display of the normal symbol is executed so as to be displayed on the symbol display 1189.

  Next, in step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a causes the main control MPU 4100a to move when the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stop of the variation control of the normal symbol suggests "per common figure". A piece (normally-powered combination) 2111 is operated to execute processing for controlling the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101.

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the gate passing process (step S2010) of the above-mentioned normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate passage processing according to this embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the counter value, the hold number of the normal symbol is a value less than the maximum value "4". It is determined whether or not (step S2011).

  Then, when the number of reserved normal symbols is a value less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), main control MPU 4100a sets step S2012 to newly put variable display control of normal symbols on hold status. Execute the processing of S2014. First, as the process of step S2012, the normal hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S2013, the normal random number and the common-pattern variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S2014, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Thereafter, the gate passing process is ended.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a does not newly suspend variable symbol display control of normal symbols if the number of reservations of normal symbols is the maximum value (NO in step S2011). That is, the gate passing process is ended without executing the processes of step S2012 to step S2014.

[Normal pattern normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) of the above-mentioned normal control processing (FIG. 143) will be described. The normal symbol normal processing is executed when the normal symbol process flag indicates that the main processing should be performed in the above-mentioned normal control processing. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal symbol normal processing of this embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the pending state (YES in step S 2101), the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100 a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode is read out from the same RAM (step S2102). And while doing the countdown which subtracts 1 normally pending number counter (step S2103), it is related to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the normal design which is stored in each storage area of the normal retention storage area of RAM of main control MPU4100a. The random number (normal random number, common drawing random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out mode (step S2104).

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the spread gate 2301 sequentially from the first (first) area of the normal symbol storage area with four storage areas. Do. And, when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, if the game ball passes through the spread gate 2301, the random number extracted to the n + 1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in the order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state (step S2105). Then, if the current gaming state is the short time gaming state (YES in step S2105), the common time chart reduction time determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2106), and the current gaming state is the non-short time gaming state If it is (NO in step S2105), a common drawing determination table (not shown) for non-short time is selected (step S2107). After that, the common drawing determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or step S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read out in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

  The per-normal-pattern determination table is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and is used when the gaming state is non-temporal when the gaming state is non-temporal. It has a determination table for non-time-to-time regular drawing. Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. Usually, random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the out-of-plane mis-discrimination determination value. As described above, in the time saving game state, when there is passage of the gaming ball to the common drawing gate 2301, the common drawing always wins, and the movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 is operated and the first starting opening 2101 It is controlled so that the winning of the game ball to special prize winning opening 2101b becomes possible.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all the 255 types of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the standard deviation judgment value. As described above, in the non-time-saving game state, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301, since it is not won per common drawing, through the opening operation of the movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 It is not controlled so that winning of a game ball to the special installation winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 becomes possible. In addition, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time-saving gaming state, and in this case the winning probability (for example, 50%) lower than the time-short gaming state, the lottery result of the normal symbol is When it comes to a hit, the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is opened for a time shorter than the short time gaming state, for example, for 0.1 second, and then closing operation after enabling winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b It may be made to make winning of the game ball to special installation winning a prize mouth 2101b impossible.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it becomes a common drawing as a result of the process of step S2108 described above (step S2109). Then, in the case of per common drawing (YES in step S2109), after setting a per common drawing per shot flag indicating that the variation of the normal symbol is elected per common drawing (step S2110), the normal design is A symbol per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of variation control stop is determined (step S2112).

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a is dislocated as a result of the process of step S2108 described above (NO in step S2109), the common control as a mode (stop symbol of normal symbol) when variation control of normal symbol is stopped The off symbol is determined (step S2111).

  After completion of the processing of step S2112 or step S2111, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S2200) (step S2113), and this processing is ended. .

  In the present embodiment, the hit probability of hitting the normal symbol in the non-short game mode where the time saving function does not operate is 0%, and the hit probability of the normal symbol in the short game mode when the short function is activated is 100%. But it is not limited to this. In the short time game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the winning opening 2101a, ie, short time gaming In the state, it may be any game specification of an ordinary symbol capable of guiding the player so that the player does not strike left but strike right (winning probability per common drawing, common drawing fluctuation time, opening pattern of common electric character). Specifically, in the time saving game state, a regular drawing probability changing function that increases the winning probability per common drawing compared to the non-short time gaming state, a common drawing fluctuation shortening function that shortens the common drawing fluctuation time, and an opening operation by the ordinary electric character At least one function of the general-purpose program release extension function for extending (winning assistance control) is provided. As a result, in the time saving game state, a prize assistance reinforcing control that further strengthens the prize assistance control set in the non-time saving game state is executed.

[Game specification of special symbol]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 146 (A), the hit winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (A), in the first special symbol lottery of this embodiment, when the winning probability is the normal state (low probability state), the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399. Also, in the case of a probability variation state (high probability state) in which the hit winning probability is set higher than the normal state, a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45. In the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, only a big hit occurs in which the condition device operates, and a small hit in which the condition device does not operate does not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) described above, the big hit determination is performed with a 1/399 or 1/45 win probability according to the probability state at the time of lottery execution.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (B), the hit probability in the second special symbol lottery of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the hit in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery described above. The small hit election probability in the second special symbol lottery, when the big hit election probability is a normal state (low probability state), wins a small hit with a probability of 390/399, the jackpot probability probability probability change state (high probability state) If it is, it wins a small hit with a probability of 44/45. The small hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, and does not change between the normal state and the definite changing state like the big hit winning probability. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-mentioned second change start process (FIG. 135), a big hit determination is performed with a win probability of 1/399 or 1/45, depending on the probability state at the time of lottery execution. Alternatively, the small hit determination is performed with a 44/45 winning probability.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high. In particular, the second special symbol lottery in the definite variation state is characterized in that it is set to always win the small hit if it did not win the big hit. The small hit may not always win if the player does not win the big hit. The small hit in this case may be selected as long as it is much higher than the probability of losing if the big win is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the definite variation state.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 146 (C), the big hit type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), in the big hit of this embodiment, the first big hit A and the first big hit B which can be generated in the first special symbol lottery, and the second big hit which can be generated in the second special symbol lottery There are a total of four types of jackpots, A and the second jackpot B.

  The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol A at this time. In addition, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, at this time the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol B.

  The second big hit A occurs at a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol A at this time. Also, the second big hit B occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, at this time the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol B.

  These four types of big hit transition the game state after the end of the big hit game to a definite change state with probability of 100%, and continue the definite change state until the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the big hit game is executed 70 times It is provided to be able to give a function. In addition, the first jackpot A can be provided with a time-saving function that operates movable piece (normal electric combination) 2111 to assist winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Provided in

  Also, the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of the big hit, the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A and the second big hit B are open patterns A, B, C respectively And D are set. Here, the number of winning balls obtainable by the player is changed by the opening pattern, and the interest of the big hit game is enhanced.

  The open patterns A to C are set so that the open time of the big winning opening 2103 is long and the player can obtain a sufficient winning ball. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are a big hit game in which four round games are played, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings of each round are set so that the player can obtain 500 balls as a winning ball. Also, the opening pattern C is a big hit game in which 16 round games are played, and the opening time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can obtain 2000 balls as a winning ball.

  On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 is short and the player can not acquire a sufficient winning ball. For example, the opening pattern D is set so that the player can not substantially acquire a winning ball by repeating high-speed opening in which one opening time is short in a big hit game in which 16 round games are played.

  Next, the small hit type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (D). As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the small hit of this embodiment is provided with a second small hit C which can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C occurs with a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol C at this time. Further, an opening pattern E is set to the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time and is provided to be capable of winning a prize ball by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning intended to be won by the player by hitting the gaming ball into the gaming area with the intention of winning the large winning opening 2013, but in the gaming area where the large winning opening 2013 is disposed. It means a prize that can be acquired by the fact that the game ball which has been struck has accidentally flowed down the position where the prize can be won at the time of opening the big prize port 2013. In the second small hit C, if the player has hit the game ball with a right hit, the number of rounds and one opening time of the big winning opening 2013 can be expected so that a prize of about 1 to 2 balls can be expected accidentally. Is set. In the case where about one or two balls are won in the large winning opening 2013 by the second small hit C, it is possible to obtain a prize ball of about 15 to 30 balls.

  In the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided frequently so that the player continuously strikes the game ball by hitting the ball in the rush mode. It is possible to promote an accidental winning based on the second small hit C that occurs during, and the majority of the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the rush mode (total number of winning balls) which can be obtained during the rush mode. Will occupy In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum of 30 balls) of ST number (70 times) is generated in the rush mode, the winning balls (maximum of 2000 balls) or more by the large hit (maximum of 2100 balls) Because it can be expected), it will not cause a decrease in the interest of the game due to the occurrence of a small hit that can hardly obtain a prize ball. Rather, since the small hit game that occurs a plurality of times causes one's interest in the game to continue rather than one big hit game, it is possible to enhance the interest of a series of games in the rush mode.

  Moreover, with reference to FIG. 146 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 146 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of this embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). For the variation time of the first special symbol, 30 seconds to 60 seconds are set according to the presence or absence of reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second is set when the game mode is the rush mode It is set. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, 600 seconds is set when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second is set when the game mode is the rush mode.

  Here, the normal mode is a game mode that urges the player to win a game ball (ie, "left-handed") to the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101, and the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery Indicates a normal gaming state in which the normal state (low probability state) and the time saving function are not provided. In addition, the rush preparation mode is a game mode that urges the player to win a game ball (ie, "right-handed") to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery Indicates a high probability time short game state in which a probability change state (high probability state) and a time saving function are provided. The rush mode is a game mode that urges the player to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 (ie, "right-handed"), and the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a definite change state (high probability) State) and indicates a high probability non-time game state where time saving function is not provided. In addition, the high probability time short game state of rush preparation mode is a game state which can shift to generation of the above-mentioned 1st big hit A as a trigger.

  As described above, the above-described specs (hit probability, hit type, fluctuation time, and the like) of the special symbol game provided to the player change in accordance with the game state. The transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is the special ST number (70 times in this case) granted Triggered by the end of the symbol lottery (variation).

[Transition of gaming state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, control of simultaneous variation control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the transition of the gaming state and each gaming state will be described. FIG. 147 is a view showing the transition of the game state (game mode) of the present embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is the normal game state (normal mode). In the normal gaming state, aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500 and firing a game ball (so-called “left-handed”) causes the game ball to win a prize at the always winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101. Is the best playing method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment can be easily won simply by aiming the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and hitting (so-called “right-handed”) game balls following the flow-down path. Provided in The second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 2102 has a high probability of winning a small hit where a winning ball can be obtained (390/399 in the normal state, 44/45 in the definite variation state). In this case, the player strikes right from the start of the game to aim for winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the variation of the second special symbol in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) not recommending winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The time is set to change for a long time (600 seconds). As a result, since it takes a long time to stop and be displayed (if the lottery result becomes clear) when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it is possible to suppress the player from hitting the right. .

  In addition, since the 2nd starting opening 2102 of this embodiment is always open and winning is easy, in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102, the second special in the gaming state which does not recommend the winning Although the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second start opening 2102 into the easy-to-win state and the hard-to-win state is provided, and a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) not recommending winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 It may be set to a difficult state. In this embodiment, in order to provide a game in which the player can easily obtain points while avoiding the complication of the configuration and processing relating to the control of the state conversion member, it is possible for the player to change the fluctuation time according to the game state. I am induced to play in the best way to play.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a). Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, while the normal gaming state is continued, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode, Transition to the first advantageous gaming state). In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes the first big hit B, it shifts to high probability non time short game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state (generation of gaming state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high probability time short gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first jackpot A gives the player an advantageous benefit for the player of winning the prize ball and providing the probability changing function and the time saving function.

  In the high probability time short game state (lash preparation mode), the special game winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is achieved by aiming the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and firing the game ball (so-called "right strike"). It is the best game method for the player to make the game ball a prize.

  Here, when the right-handed game ball passes through the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the right play area 1100 of the center character 2500, since the time-saving function is activated, the common drawing lottery is derived in the normal symbol lottery (100% probability per common figure in time-shortened state). As a result, the movable piece (normal motorized combination) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, as described above, in the short time game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the winning opening 2101a. Since the player is set high, the player makes a right strike to aim at the special winning opening 2101b.

  Therefore, in the high probability time short game state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 (specially-provided winning opening 2101 b). And, when the result of the special symbol lottery becomes the losing continuously 70 times, it moves to normal game state (normal mode). In addition, when the result of becoming the first big hit A is derived by the special symbol lottery being executed 70 times, the number of STs is reset to 70 times and the main gaming state (the rush preparation mode, the first advantageous gaming state) To continue. In addition, when the result of becoming the first big hit B is derived by the special symbol lottery being executed 70 times, it shifts to high probability non time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability time short game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the high probability time short game state (generation of the gaming state transition triggered by the second jackpot of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high probability short time gaming state (lash preparation mode) to the high probability non-short time gaming state (lash mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first jackpot B gives the player an advantageous benefit for the player of winning the prize ball and providing the probability changing function.

  In the high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the game ball is hit in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500 and fired (so-called "right-handed") to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 Is the best way for the player to play the game.

  Here, the second starting opening 2102 of the present embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center character 2500. For this reason, the game ball hit to the right reaches the second starting opening 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the common drawing gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b, but since the time saving function does not operate, the common drawing gate Even if it passes through 2301, a per-diagram hit (that is, an easy-to-win prize state of the special winning opening 2101 b by the operation of the movable piece 2111) does not occur. Therefore, the game ball hit to the right in the high probability non-short play state (rush mode) substantially wins the second starting opening 2102.

  Therefore, in the high probability non-short game state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery put on hold in the gaming state before the transition when the gaming state shifts. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the main gaming state is a result that is not a big hit continuously 70 times, it shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, when the result of becoming a big hit is derived by the special symbol lottery being executed 70 times, the number of ST is reset to 70 times, this game state (rush mode, 2nd advantageous game state) continue.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high probability non-short game state, when the big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hit game generated at this time, the player can obtain a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a winning ball which is smaller than the game balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main gaming state, the player can obtain a prize ball by the small hit game every execution of the second special symbol lottery until the next big hit. And, in this game state, up to 70 small hit games can occur continuously. That is, a series of second special symbol games until the next big hit occurrence becomes a bonus game that can obtain a winning ball.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high probability non-short game state is set to a short time (1 second). Since it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery in this gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time until the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes clear. It is also conceivable to do. However, in this embodiment, the application period of the probability variation function is controlled by the number of times of execution of the special symbol (the number of STs), and the number of STs is counted at the start of variation of the special symbol. For this reason, when the variation time of the first special symbol to which the probability change function is to be added becomes long, the first special symbol is provided with the probability change function but the second special symbol is not provided with the probability change function. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, the event with different probability states between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous variation state It prevents the occurrence (obscuring the end of the probability change state). As a modification, in the case of controlling the end of the provision period of the probability change function until the occurrence of the next big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol in the main gaming state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery in simultaneous variation, so it is not possible to obscure the termination of the definite variation state as described above. Does not occur.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) can obtain a prize ball in a series of small special games with a second special symbol even if a big hit is not derived, and the total number of prize balls Is more than the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the big hit game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high probability time short gaming state (the rush preparation mode, the first advantageous gaming state) but the high probability non-short gaming state (the rush mode, the second advantageous gaming state).

  The high probability non-short game state (rush mode) is a game state that can be generated when the first big hit B is derived in the first special symbol lottery, so the player first, normal game state (normal mode) or high In the short time game state (a rush preparation mode), a game aimed at winning a game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is played. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high probability non-short game state (lash mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit B, the player next attempts to play a game aiming for the game ball to reach the second starting opening 2102 Do.

[Control timing chart of each gaming state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed. However, a big hit game or a small hit game using the attack device 2100 can not be generated redundantly in both games. Therefore, referring to FIGS. 148 and 149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each gaming state will be described.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart explaining the simultaneous fluctuation control of the present embodiment. FIG. 148A shows an example of interlocking stop control of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148B shows a first interlocking setting process in the rush mode (FIG. 133). Is an example of interlocking stop control of.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal mode (normal gaming state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability time short gaming state), the variation of the second special symbol when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 The time (second fluctuation time) is set to 600 seconds, and long-term fluctuation is started to be executed. And, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a or special opening winning opening 2101b), the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, and 1 Special symbol variation is executed.

  In the game of the first special symbol side, when the big hit is derived, the fluctuation is stopped by the stop symbol of the first big hit (step S502a), and the game of the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side The interlock flag (second interlock flag) to be set is set to the on state (step S505a). Then, the first jackpot game is executed (steps S190a and S200a).

  Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, in response to the second interlocking flag being turned on, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the second special symbol being changed is The display is forcibly stopped by the stop symbol of detachment (step S1003b).

  Here, the second interlocking flag is a big hit game or small hit in which the same as the second special symbol side is used when the first big hit game is executed where the first special symbol side uses the attacker device 2100. The flag is provided to avoid the game being executed, but is also a flag required to prepare for rush mode entry.

  Specifically, when the first jackpot B occurs in the normal mode (normal gaming state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability time short gaming state), the gaming state after the end of the first big hit game is the rush mode (high Transition to a certain non-time game state). In the rush mode after transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 2102 is mainstream. At this time, if the change of the second special symbol started before the transition is continued, the game on the second special symbol side waits for the stop of the change and becomes the standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is also a flag necessary to start the game in the rush mode smoothly.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (B), immediately after the shift to the rush mode (high probability non-short game state), the variation of the first special symbol held in the game state before the shift is executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). And in rush mode, the game of the 2nd special symbol based on winning of a game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102 is mainstream. The second starting opening 2102 is a winning opening which allows winning even if the player is a game beginner, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to one second, so the variation of the second special symbol frequently occurs. In addition, the second special symbol that does not derive a big hit derives a small hit.

  Therefore, in the second special symbol side game, the variation of the second special symbol and the small hit game (second small hit game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurrence. Then, every time the second special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (step S502 b), the interlocking flag (first interlocking flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side to the second special symbol side is set to the on state Step S532b). Then, the second small hit game is executed (steps S230b and S240b), and when the second small hit game ends, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

  In the game on the first special symbol side, in response to the first interlocked flag being turned on, the first interlocked setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed. At this time, the first special symbol whose fluctuation has not started is put on standby so as not to start fluctuation (step S1021a), and the fluctuation is started when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol during change is forcibly stopped and displayed with the stop symbol of disengaging (step S1003a).

  Thus, in the normal mode and rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side is mainstream, the execution frequency of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the rush mode in which the game on the second special symbol side is mainstream Then, the frequency of execution of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In this embodiment, there is a concern that the hit game will be duplicated between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, so to avoid this, the game on one side is avoided When a hit is obtained, the game on the other side is controlled by interlock setting processing at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

  When the player starts playing, first, the normal mode starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to hit the left and aim at the constant winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101. Here, if the launch force of the game ball at the beginning of hitting is too strong to be right-handed and the game ball wins the second starting opening 2102, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is long Long-term fluctuations are performed.

  After that, when the player adjusts the launch force and strikes the left, and the gaming ball wins the regular winning opening 2101 a of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds in accordance with the selected fluctuation pattern. In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the first big hit A is won, the variation is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol A, and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the on state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the long-term fluctuation state is forcibly displayed in the form of a disengaging symbol. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

  In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to aim at the special prize winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 by hitting right. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a time varying function is provided which performs a probability changing function of 70 times of ST times and a prize assisting control for facilitating a prize winning on the special prize winning opening 2101b.

  When the player performs a right strike and the gaming ball is won in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds in accordance with the selected fluctuation pattern. In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. And, at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one. When the first jackpot B is won when the count of the ST number is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol B, and the first jackpot game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the on state, but the state is maintained because the variation of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to hit the right and aim for the second opening 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the probability changing function of 70 times of ST times is provided. Here, the ST number at which the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is 68 is counted again from the count value of 70.

  Here, the player continues to hit the right. Since the time saving function does not operate, the right-handed game ball does not win a prize at the special prize winning opening 2101 b and wins at a second starting aperture 2102 further below. Since winning to the second starting opening 2102 is easy even for a game beginner, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 frequently occurs. Since the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol at this time is set to one second, the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, the second special symbol lottery in which the player wins a big hit with a probability of 1/45, and wins a small hit if the player does not win the big hit is executed. And, at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, when it is a small hit, the variation is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hit game is performed, the first interlocking flag is set to the on state.

  In addition, immediately after the rush mode is started, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b generated in the rush preparation mode before transition is on hold, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is It will be executed.

  In the first special symbol side game, a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol at this time is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, small hit games frequently occur in the second special symbol side game, so the first interlock flag is also frequently set to the on state. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped changing, if the first special symbol is changing, it is forcibly displayed in a disengaging symbol. And since the 1st interlocking flag is returned to an OFF state with the end of the 2nd small hit game, the change of the next 1st special symbol is started. And, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ST number is updated by subtracting one.

  As described above, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are efficiently executed in a short time, so that the speed of subtraction of the ST number is also fast. Then, the variation of the second special symbol and the second small hit game are repeatedly executed alternately until the count value of the ST number becomes 0 or the jackpot is won next time.

  In the rush mode of the present embodiment, since the small hit is won when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the second small hit game occurs frequently. The number of award balls obtainable in the rush mode is 2100 when the number of times of ST number (70) is small hit, assuming that the number of prize balls for one second small hit game is 30 balls. This is larger than the maximum award ball number (2000 balls) obtainable by the jackpot game of the present embodiment. Therefore, a series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be a bonus game comparable to a big hit game. In addition, since there is also the possibility of becoming a big hit game with a probability of 1/45 even in the rush mode, the rush mode is the most advantageous (to be aimed) game mode for the player.

  It should be noted that the number of STs in the rush mode is more likely to be beneficial to the player if it is digested by the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable not to carry over the first special symbol on hold in the rush mode. Therefore, when it is determined that the transition to the rush mode is found, that is, when it is determined that the first jackpot B will be won in the game mode before the transition, the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is suppressed Control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled such that the operation stop of the short function and the prize assisting function are reduced when assisting the prize to the special prize winning opening 2101b. In addition, some notification effects may be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Control on peripheral control board side]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151.

[Submain processing]
FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the sub main processing of this embodiment. The sub main process is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs an initial setting process (step S3001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" is started (step S3002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. A process is performed to set the flag T and reset (set to 0) the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0".

  If 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” (YES in step S3002), peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “0” (step S3003), and then performs the 16 ms steady process. Execute (step S3004). In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100.

  After completing the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns to the process of step S3002 again, and repeats the process of steps S3003 to S3004 described above every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140 a does not set the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “1” (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”) (NO in step S3002), the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Execute loop processing.

[16 ms steady process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16 ms steady process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the above-mentioned sub main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 16 ms steady process of this embodiment.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes command analysis processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 4100 (step S3101). Next, presentation control processing is executed to control the contents of presentation to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control command (the received fluctuation pattern command and the like) analyzed in the command analysis processing described above (step S3102).

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process is performed to control the effects of the lamps and LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 (step S3104). In addition, processing for sending lighting signal of lamp / LED to lamp driving board 3041 and processing for sending driving signal to driving motor for operating various rendering units to motor driving board 3045, output information for executing rendering Information output processing is executed (step S3105). Thereafter, random number update processing for updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control processing of step S3102 is executed (step S3106), and the 16 ms stationary processing is ended.

  The 16 ms steady process is normally finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the 16 ms steady process from the beginning (the process of step S3101) when 16 ms has passed since the process was started. There is nothing to do. That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (step S3002) in the sub main process, and the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in the sub main process after the 16 ms steady process is completed. When it is determined (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady process is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random number updating process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub main process (FIG. 150) described above.

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) and the second based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 (2) A control structure capable of simultaneously changing the special symbol, and a winning area (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b, second starting opening 2102) that the player should aim for according to the gaming state or a game ball operation A plurality of gaming states are provided such that (right-handed (second game state), left-handed (first game state)) are different. In this embodiment, by providing the function display unit 1180 with a game state indicator 1183 including an LED capable of clearly notifying the player of the timing of performing “right-handed” (second game state), the game beginner can be Also, it is possible to switch the striking method (the striking operation) smoothly along with the transition of the gaming state without making a mistake between the "left strike" and the "right strike".

  Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sends a control signal for controlling the gaming state indicator 1183 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 to "right-hand" the player in the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may alert | report. Usually, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in a front view of the player (the end of the front line of sight). Therefore, when “right-handed” is notified in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player may switch to an appropriate striking method (driving-in operation) without shifting the line of sight to the front end left side (function display unit 1180). It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state (normal mode), a high probability short time gaming state (lash preparation mode), and a high probability non-short time gaming state (lash mode). And, in the rush mode, every time a second special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 that is easy for the game beginner to win is performed, the player gets a chance to win the winning ball (small hit game or Big hit game) is awarded. Further, the number of game balls obtainable by the player in the rush mode tends to be higher in the ratio of the number of game balls obtainable in the small hit game than in the big hit game. As a result, since a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be expected to be able to grant more game balls than the big hit game, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game for the small hit game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the high probability non-short game state rush mode (second advantageous game state) operates the short function generally considered to be advantageous to the player. The game state is more advantageous to the player than the mode (first advantageous game state). And, if the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function It controls to continue rush mode without operating. Since the small hit game of the present embodiment can provide a game that reverses the established concept that the time saving function is activated (given) is advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second winning opening 2102 based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special installed opening 2101b) When the second special symbol based on the simultaneous change, when one hit (big hit, small hit) is derived, the other during the change is forced to stop display with the off symbol. This avoids duplication of hits between the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game, and before and after transition when transitioning to another gaming state triggered by a big hit Can be prevented from running across the other.

Second Embodiment
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention is, as described above, a game ball to the first special symbol and the second start hole 2102 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2101 (always winning hole 2101a, special winning hole 2101b). And a second special symbol based on the winning of the second symbol. In such simultaneously variable control, in order to avoid that a specific game (small hit game, big hit game) occurs redundantly between the game of the first special symbol side and the game of the second special symbol side Control is required. In the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol stops changing with the stop symbol indicating the specific result (small hit, big hit), the stop symbol is replaced with the removed symbol if the other special symbol is changing. By controlling so that the other special symbol does not change during the specific game, a control structure that can change simultaneously is formed.

  In the second embodiment, various control patterns of the simultaneously variable control structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. About the member which has a function common to the game board 4 (refer FIG. 114) of above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 according to the second embodiment will be described.

  In the game area on the right side of the center role 2500 of the second embodiment, a regular drawing gate 2301, a second starting port 2102, a special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, and a special winning opening 2103 are disposed in order from the upstream ing.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming balls having flowed down the right passage 2545 first reach the spread gate 2301. Then, when the game ball passes through the common drawing gate 2301, the normal symbol lottery is executed. In addition, a second starting port 2102 is disposed below the general drawing gate 2301. The second starting port is also provided so as to be able to accept the game balls that have passed through the drawing gate 2301 and the game balls that have not passed. If the game ball is received in the second start opening 2102, the second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special start condition is established.

  The special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 is disposed immediately below the second starting opening 2102. The special prize winning opening 2101 b is provided with a pair of movable members (normally-powered prizes) 2111 opened at the top in a reverse “ha” shape to convert the gaming ball into a state easy to receive (acceptable state). The pair of movable members 2111 normally maintain a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) at an interval of about the diameter of the gaming ball. The special winning opening 2101 b is provided with the second starting opening 2102 at the upper side, so that the gaming ball can not be received when the movable member 2111 is closed. The movable member 2111 is converted from the closed state to the easy-to-accept state when winning the normal symbol lottery, whereby acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b is permitted. Then, in the case where the game ball is received at the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101, if the predetermined special start condition is established, the first special symbol lottery is executed.

  In addition, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery hit the opening operation under the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 and can receive the game ball which has flowed down the right passage 2545 at the time of operation An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attack device 2100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called combined tacker device that opens the special winning opening 2103 by the opening and closing operation of two opening and closing members (first opening and closing members 2106 a and second opening and closing members 2106 b) sliding in the front and rear direction. The details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front lower left portion of the front component 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the first embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with an LED capable of clearly indicating the timing of performing "right-handed" (second game state) in the gaming state indicator 1183. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming state display A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the vessel 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is disposed at the upper right portion of the center product 2500 and at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920 according to the gaming state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, although the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment and the gaming board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above have differences in configuration as described above, their gaming characteristics (recommended gaming mode transition , And the recommended driving operation in the game mode is the same.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 (A) to (C), the configurations of the attacker 2100, the function display unit 1180 and the 7-segment display 1920 of the second embodiment will be described.

[Attacker]
FIG. 153 (A) is a simplified structural view of an attacker device 2100 provided in the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

  Attacker drive mechanism 2121 for opening and closing the opening and closing members of the special winning opening 2103, the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106b, which can operate between the closed state and the open state, and 2 (FIG. Reference). The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is characterized in that one opening / closing port 2103 is provided with two opening / closing members (a first opening / closing member 2106 a and a second opening / closing member 2106 b).

  The first opening / closing member 2106 a and the second opening / closing member 2106 b normally maintain a closed state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed so that the gaming ball can not be received in the large winning opening 2103. It is configured as a part of a guiding channel 2110 for guiding the gaming ball having flowed down the right playing area to the playing area below the center character 2500.

  Then, when a hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, after the fluctuation display according to the lottery is finished, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 is performed, and the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing The slide opening / closing operation of the member 2106 b in the front-rear direction is performed. Opening and closing operations of the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

  Here, the first opening and closing member 2106 a and the second opening and closing member 2106 b are arranged in parallel on the upstream side and the downstream side of the induction flow channel 2110 at intervals. That is, the special winning opening 2103 has two openings which can receive the game ball when it is in the open state. The special winning opening 2103 is configured to merge internally regardless of which opening the gaming ball is received from, and the acceptance of the gaming ball is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

  In this manner, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment opens the big winning opening 2103 by opening the two places by the first opening and closing member 2106 a on the upstream side and the second opening and closing member 2106 b on the downstream side. The large hit hole 2103 is provided with a combi tucker structure that enables a plurality of gaming balls rolling on the induction channel 2110 from the upstream to the downstream in the opening of the game.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153 (B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100.

  The function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 consisting of two LEDs for notifying that it is the time to “right-hand” above the display unit 1181. Below the right-handed status indicator 1192 are four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit". A first special symbol storage indicator 1184 comprising a round indicator 1190, and two LEDs arranged below the round indicator 1190 to indicate the number of pendings regarding the acceptance of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 And the first special symbol lottery result (first special lottery result) disposed on the right side of the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 and drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 as the first special symbol A first special symbol display 1185 consisting of eight LED groups for display is provided. In addition, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol memory display 1187 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102, and the second To display the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol arranged on the left side of the special symbol memory display 1187 and drawn by the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 as the second special symbol A second special symbol display 1186 consisting of eight LED groups is provided.

  In addition, below the display section 1181, there are a gaming state indicator 1183 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and a normal symbol consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding passage of the common view gate 2301. A memory indicator 1188 and an ordinary symbol indicator 1189 consisting of two LEDs for displaying an ordinary lottery result selected by the game ball passing through the regular drawing gate 2301 as an ordinary symbol are provided side by side. There is.

  The right-handed state indicator 1192 of this embodiment lights the LED when it is time to perform the “right-handed” (second gaming state) to notify the player of “right-handed”. It is to be noted that the LED is turned off when it is time to perform the "left-handed" (first gaming state).

  In this embodiment, the main control board is a signal that warns the player when passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301 generated by the “right strike” is detected when it is the timing of “left strike”. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message warning that the liquid crystal display device 1900 returns to the left, and sounds an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). After that, if “right strike” is detected as well, it is characterized in that penalty control is performed to impose a predetermined penalty which is disadvantageous to the player.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153 (C) is an enlarged front view of a 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 according to the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

  The 7-segment display 1920 displays the variable display (lottery processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and information on the number of reservations. A 7-segment display 1920 includes a first special symbol display portion 1921 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying variable display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and the number of reserved first special symbols. The first special symbol memory display unit 1922 consisting of two LEDs, the fourth symbol display unit 1923 consisting of one LED for displaying the fourth symbol related to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol A second special symbol display unit 1924 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying a display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display unit 1925 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending second special symbols A fourth symbol display unit 1926 including one LED for displaying a fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the second special symbol is provided.

  The 7-segment LEDs that make up the first special symbol display portion 1921 and the second special symbol display portion 1924 indicate that the variable display is in progress by repeating turning on and off (that is, blinking) of each segment in order, and a predetermined value is displayed according to the result. By lighting the segments, the fluctuation result (lottery result) is displayed. During the standby, the same segment is lit as when the lottery result is out.

  The two LEDs that make up the first special symbol storage display unit 1922 are off when the number of reservations is "0", the upper LED is on when the number of reservations is "1", and the lower LED is off, When the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs light, when the number of reservations is "3", the upper LED blinks, the lower LED lights, and when the number of reservations is "4" both LEDs It blinks.

  The two LEDs that make up the second special symbol memory display unit 1925 turn off when the number of reservations is "0", the upper LED lights up when the number of reservations is "1", and the lower LED turns off, When the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs are lit. In the present embodiment, it is possible to store “1” pieces of second special symbol hold.

  One LED constituting the fourth symbol display portion 1923, 1926 can emit light in red and green instead of single color light emission, repeats turning on and off in red during fluctuation display, and in green when the fluctuation result is out of color Lights up and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is hit (big hit, small hit).

  Then, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high probability time short gaming state (lash preparation mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variation display of the second special symbol Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. Also, when the gaming state is high probability non-short game state (lash mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 Be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display device on which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed is switched according to the game state. In addition, the transition of the gaming state is triggered by the big hit as the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or the end of the provided ST number. When a big hit is triggered, the special symbol to be displayed is switched between the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 after the big hit game is over. Further, in the case where the end of the ST number is a trigger, when the final change of ST ends and the probability change flag is set to off (step S513a in FIG. 129, step S513b in FIG. 137), liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 7 The special symbol to be displayed is switched with the segment display 1920.

[Game specification of special symbol]
Subsequently, FIG. 154 shows an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment described above will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A) and FIG. 154 (B), in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the definite variation state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Also, the small hit winning probability is always 1/3.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), there are four types of jackpot types and there is no change, but the presence or absence of the time saving function differs depending on the gaming state in which each has been won. In the present embodiment, the time-saving function is given to the big hit other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, in order to enter the rush mode, there is no alternative but to use the jackpot B of the first special symbol as a trigger. Further, as shown in the above-described time saving function setting process (FIG. 132), the time saving function is not given to the jackpot occurring in the rush mode.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (D), the number of types of small hits increases in this embodiment. In the small hit of this embodiment, a second small hit D is provided in addition to the second small hit C which can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C and the second small hit D differ in the opening mode of the large winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The open pattern E has a short open time (eg, 1.8 seconds) and is open only once, whereas the open pattern F has a further short open time (eg, 0.9 seconds). ), Opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a second small hit C or a second small hit D occurs with a probability of 50%.

  In the opening pattern E and the opening pattern F, the opening pattern F can be expected to win a prize in the special winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided with the large winning opening 2103 which can be opened at two places, upstream and downstream of the guiding channel 2110 where the gaming ball flows down, and can receive the gaming ball, so The expectation of winning of the game ball is larger in the case of the opening pattern F which is opened twice even if the opening time is short.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 154E, in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the variation result. The fluctuation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a hit is a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time when it is a losing is a long time fluctuation of 600 seconds. When the game mode is the rush mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is a shortened variation having a width of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of gaming state]
Subsequently, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the transition of the gaming state (FIG. 147) in the first embodiment described above will be described.

  In the first embodiment described above, the rush preparation mode can be shifted upon occurrence of the first big hit A (FIG. 146), but in the present embodiment the first big hit A, the second big hit A and the first in the normal mode It is possible to shift upon occurrence of 2 big hit B (Fig. 154). The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is a transition to the normal mode due to the variable number of STs or a transition to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first jackpot B. In addition, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) is due to the fluctuation of the ST number. In rush mode, the mode does not shift when any big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a hit (small hit, big hit), the fluctuation time is shortened by one second. Essentially, the game mode which urges the game balls to win the second starting opening 2102 is a rush mode, but it is highly likely that a win for the second starting opening 2102 will be aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, if the result of the second special symbol lottery derives the release, it is set to a long time fluctuation (600 seconds), or even after the small hit result is determined, the game ball may be launched toward the attacker device 2100. By setting the opening timing not to be in time for the opening of the big winning opening 2103 in the hit game, or making it difficult to estimate the opening pattern by providing a plurality of opening modes, the second in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode Suppress the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the winning of the special start winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, that is, the game in the rush preparation mode in which “right strike” is recommended, is diversified. In the first embodiment, even if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 2102 by "right-handed", the variation of the second special symbol is a long time, so the interest can be found only in the variation of the first special symbol It was not. However, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode takes a short time when deriving the hit result, and the short-time fluctuation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. And if it becomes a big hit result by the 2nd special symbol lottery, ST frequency is newly given and a time saving function will also be continued. For this reason, the interest can be found in the change of the second special symbol, and the game in the rush preparation mode is improved.

Control pattern
Next, referring to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 The outline of the control pattern in the control structure capable of simultaneously changing with the second special symbol based on. FIG. 156 is a diagram for describing an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure. In the following, the outline of four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (D).

  First, FIG. 156 (A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. The basic control pattern is to forcibly replace the special symbol in the other change with the result and to stop the change, as described in the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol is hit and the result is hit. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), when the variation of the second special symbol stops at the small hit stop symbol, the first special symbol in change is the determined big hit stop symbol in a predetermined off stop symbol Replace and stop fluctuating with the off stop symbol.

  Specifically, in accordance with the control process of the first embodiment, in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) relating to the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is timed up, and the variation in the small hitting stop symbol When is stopped, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES in step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO in step S504b → YES in step S531b → S532b). Thereby, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) related to the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the variation of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a → Step S250a).

  Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the first special symbol in motion is stopped and displayed with a predetermined off symbol (YES in step S1001a → step S1002a → step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a hit (hit determination process) is a step of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) which is executed when the first special symbol is started to be varied. It is executed in S307a, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined along with the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the first interlocked setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stop symbol (here, the big hit symbol) is replaced with a predetermined off symbol.

  As described above, in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, the interlock flag for interlocking the game on the other special symbol side to the one special symbol side is turned on at the timing at which the one special symbol deriving the hit changes and stops. Set to state. For this reason, the other special symbol that occurs during the fluctuation of one special symbol is hit judgment processing because it is not possible to judge the presence or absence of the interlocking stop control at the start of the fluctuation despite the fact that the interlocking stop control forcibly results in disengaging I had to carry out (lottery processing).

  In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to ON at the timing when the special symbol deriving the hit starts to fluctuate, and the other special symbol interlocks when the fluctuation starts If is in the on state, an example will be described which is set so as to stop fluctuating with an out-of-design (without lottery) without executing the hit determination process.

  The details of the control process of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (B) is a timing chart showing the priority control pattern. The priority control pattern is to compare the results derived by the two special symbols and to preferentially execute the special symbol deriving the advantageous result for the player, and to stop the variation of the other special symbol with the detached symbol.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when a variation for deriving a small hit with the second special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol, both lottery As a result of the comparison of the results, the first special symbol for deriving the jackpot advantageous to the player stops fluctuating with the jackpot symbol. And, the second special symbol replaces the determined small hit stop symbol with a predetermined off stop symbol, and stops fluctuating with the off stop symbol.

  As described above, in the priority control pattern, the special symbol which is prioritized among the special symbols which simultaneously change in accordance with the lottery result derived by the special symbol is determined, that is, the special symbol which gives a more advantageous result for the player is prioritized It can be done. In the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, even if it is a special symbol that became a big hit in the hit judgment at the start of fluctuation, if the special symbol to be the other small hit first stops fluctuating forcibly, It has been set, but it is not unwilling to miss such special symbols that make a big hit. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine than the basic control pattern.

  The details of the control process of the priority control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern is to interrupt the other special symbol while the other special symbol is being played, while the other special symbol is to resume the fluctuation of the remaining time while the hit special game is derived. It is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), when the variation for deriving a small hit is performed with the second special symbol and the variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol is performed, the second special symbol is a small hit. The first special symbol suspends temporary fluctuation when it stops changing with the symbol. And the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the 2nd special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends fluctuation. When the small hit game is over, the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, it is possible to change and execute the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol as a result based on all acquired random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the simultaneously changing special symbols is forcibly set to be disassociated regardless of the acquired random number, but in the suspension control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( There is no overturning of the hit judgment result based on random numbers. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the above-described priority control pattern. In addition, since it is possible to make it appear that there is relevance to the hit game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the effect in the fluctuation at the time of restart, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  The details of the control process of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (D) is a timing chart showing a re-set control pattern. The reset control pattern is to reset the remaining fluctuation time when the other interrupted special symbol is resumed based on the above-mentioned interruption control pattern.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), when the variation for deriving a small hit is performed with the second special symbol and the variation for deriving a big hit with the first special symbol is performed, the second special symbol is a small hit. The first special symbol suspends temporary fluctuation when it stops changing with the symbol. And the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the 2nd special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends fluctuation. Up to this point, the control is the same as the above-described lottery control pattern. In the re-set control pattern, when the small hit game is finished and the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation, the fluctuation is newly set after setting the fluctuation time after the restart.

  As described above, in the re-set control pattern, the degree of freedom in the rendition variation is increased more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to provide a recommended game by setting the fluctuation time at the time of resumption according to the game situation.

  The details of the control process of the re-set control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, when the special symbol deriving a hit starts changing, the other special symbol's forced off flag is set to the on state, and the other special symbol has the forced off flag at the start of changing If it is in the on state, the control structure is characterized in that the movement stop is performed with the out-of-set symbol (without lottery) without executing the hit determination processing.

[First change start process]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first change start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation start processing (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after executing the processing of step S306a, determines whether or not the first special symbol forcible off flag is set to the on state to set the first special symbol to be misaligned at random. (Step S311a). Then, when the forced special release flag of the first special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S311a), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed to set the lottery result information, and the processing of step S307a and step S308a is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308a described above indicates a hit result (step S313a). And, if it is a flag indicating a hit result (YES in step S313a), a forced second flag of the second special symbol is used to make the second special symbol variation that occurs during the first special symbol variation be a result. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if it is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, if it is a flag indicating an out result (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to step S309a without executing the process of step S314a.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a sets the flag indicating the first special symbol's disconnection result and the deviation information command when the first special symbol's forced off flag is on (YES in step S311 a) (step S312a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S309a.

  As described above, in the first variation start process, when the first special symbol derives a hit result, the forced release flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state, which occurs after the variation start of the first special symbol. The second special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a shift result in no lottery.

[First jackpot game processing]
FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first jackpot gaming process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first jackpot game processing (FIG. 131) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced release flag of the second special symbol to the off state when the first big hit game is over (step S751a).

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  If the first special symbol is in motion (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the first out-of-pattern that has already been determined in step S312a of the first variation start process (FIG. 157) described above. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004a.

[Second variation start process]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the second variation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second variation start processing (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after executing the processing of step S306b, determines whether or not the second special symbol forced deviation flag is set to the on state to set the second special symbol to be out of no lottery (Step S311 b). Then, if the compulsory release flag of the second special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S311 b), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed to set the lottery result information, and the processing of step S307 b and step S308 b is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308b described above indicates a hit result (step S313b). And, if it is a flag indicating a hit result (YES in step S313b), the forced flag of the first special symbol for making the change of the first special symbol occurring during the change of the second special symbol be the result of detachment Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if it is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, if it is a flag indicating an out result (NO in step S313 b), the process proceeds to step S309 b without executing the process of step S314 b.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a second special symbol's disconnection result and an out-of-order information command (step S311 b) (YES in step S311 b). S312b). Then, it transfers to the process of step S309 b.

  As described above, in the second variation start process, when the second special symbol derives a hit result, the forced release flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state, which occurs after the variation start of the second special symbol. The first special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a shift result in no lottery.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as that of the second big hit game processing (FIG. 139) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the second big hit game is over, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forcible release flag of the first special symbol to the off state (step S751b).

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second small hitting game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as that of the second small hitting game processing (FIG. 141) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the second small hit game is over, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forcible release flag of the first special symbol to the off state (step S951 b).

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocked setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  If the second special symbol is in motion (step S1001 b), the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 is the second out-of-out symbol that has already been determined in step S312 b of the second variation start process (FIG. 160) described above. Display on the special symbol display device (step S1101 b). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004b.

[Right-handed penalty setting process]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right strike penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 regarding the warning and the penalty to the “right strike” when it is the timing of “left strike”.

  In this processing, a warning is given first when “right hitting” is performed in the gaming state where “left hitting” is recommended, and a penalty is applied when “right hitting” is performed even after the warning. Settings are made.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the current game mode is in the normal mode (low probability non-short time state) (step S1201). Then, if the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether "right-handed" has been detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of “right-handed” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the game area on the right side of the center character 2500. It should be noted that the acceptance detection of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 may be performed.

  Main control MPU 4100a ends the present process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201) or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). Do.

  Then, when the “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S1202), main control MPU 4100a determines whether a warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to "left strike". Whether or not the warning has been executed may be checked whether the warning executed flag set when the warning timer described later has timed out is in the on state.

  When the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a sets a time (warning timer) for giving a warning (step S1204). When the warning timer has timed out (YES in step S1205), the warning execution completion flag is set to the on state (step S1206), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when warning has been executed (YES in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a determines that “right-handed” is continued despite warning, and therefore imposes a predetermined period penalty.

  The main control MPU 4100a first sets a penalty timer which is a period for applying a penalty (step S1211), and sets the forced special release flag of the second special symbol to the on state (step S1212). Then, until the penalty timer times up (NO in step S1213), the forced special release flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

  When the penalty timer has timed out (YES in step S1213), main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol forcible removal flag and the warning execution completion flag to the off state (step S1214), and ends this processing.

  As described above, when “right strike” is detected in the normal mode in which “left strike” is recommended, the player is first warned to return to “left strike”. Then, if the "right strike" is continued, the "right strike" is given, and even if the game ball wins on the second starting opening 2102, a penalty period is given which results in a gap in no lottery. Then, since the player is notified (suggested) that the penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be induced to perform a proper driving operation according to the game mode.

  Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the procedure of liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-short time state) (step S3201). Then, if the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, if it is the normal mode (low probability non-short state) or the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) (NO in step S3201), the second main control MPU 4100a It is determined on the special symbol side whether or not the hit variation for deriving the hit result is executed (step S3202). Then, if the hit variation is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit variation is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a normal display effect (step S3204).

  Here, blackout refers to a display effect such as the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 being dark and having noise. The blackout is started when the special symbol to be subject to variable display on the 7-segment display 1920 starts the fluctuation for deriving the hit result, and is continued until the hit symbol is determined by the fluctuation. The special symbol displayed on the 7-segment indicator 1920 is due to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening not recommended to the player in the game mode. Therefore, it can be said that blackout is also a pre-announcement effect notifying that the hit variation has occurred due to the special symbol not recommended in the game mode.

[Right-handed penalty notification process]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notification processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding warning and penalty notification for “right-handed” when it is time to perform “left-handed”. It is one. In addition, it is an effect process corresponding to a right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether the current game mode is in the normal mode (low probability non-short time state) (step S3301). Then, if the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether "right-handed" has been detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of “right-handed” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the common drawing gate 2301 disposed in the game area on the right side of the center character 2500. It should be noted that the acceptance detection of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 may be performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the present process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302). Do.

  Then, when the “right-handed” detection is detected (YES in step S3302), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether a warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a side.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a time for giving a warning (warning timer) (step S3304). The warning timer may acquire timer information from the main control MPU 4100a described above. Then, a warning notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a message "Please return to the left" (step S3305). At this time, a warning sound may be emitted for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and a warning may be suggested. Until the warning timer times out (NO in step S3306), warning notification is performed (step S3305), and when the warning timer times up (YES in step S3306), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if warning has been executed (YES at step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a is determined to continue “right-handed” despite the warning, and therefore main control MPU 4100a performs a predetermined operation. A period penalty is imposed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a penalty timer (step S3311). Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes penalty notification to notify that a penalty has been imposed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer times up, and when the penalty timer times up (YES in step S3313), this processing ends.

<Effect by basic control pattern>
As described above, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence or absence of interlocking stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol deriving the hit starts to change, so the other special symbol started thereafter is hit when the change starts It is possible to stop fluctuating with an out-of-pattern (without lottery) without executing the determination process. Since wasteful processing can be omitted in the other special symbol for which the result of forcedly being set is set even if the hit determination processing is executed, the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the priority control pattern, the special symbol that gives the player an advantage is given priority by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is controlled to stop fluctuating with the missing symbol. It is characterized by its structure.

[First change start process]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first change start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation start processing (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  After the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the process of step S307a, it is compared with the variation of the second special symbol whether or not the present variation of the first special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player. The first priority determination process to be determined is executed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S308a and ends the present processing.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 167).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the second special symbol is changing (step S361a). Then, if there is no second special symbol being changed (NO in step SS 361a), this processing is ended because there is no comparison object.

  If there is a second special symbol being changed (YES in step S 361 a), main control MPU 4100 a acquires the result of the determination processing of the second special symbol being changed (step S 362 a), and It compares with the result of the hit determination processing of step S307a of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

  If the first special symbol is advantageous for the player (YES in step S364a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second special symbol is a result of detachment (step S365a). Then, if the result is an out result (YES in step S365a), the process ends. On the other hand, if the result is not the off result, that is, if it is the small hit or the big hit result (NO in step S365a), the forced removal flag for forcibly disengaging the second special symbol is set to the on state (step S366a ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (NO in step S364a), main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the first special symbol hit determination process to be out of step (step S367a). ), End this processing.

  As described above, in the first priority determination process, if there is a second special symbol being changed when the change is started with the first special symbol, it is determined which change result is advantageous for the player, If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is the disengaging result. If the first special symbol is not the advantageous result, the first special symbol is the disapproval result. Make sure that the game does not occur twice with the special symbol.

[Process during first change]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the first variation-in-progress process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. In addition, about the process in common with the 1st process (FIG. 129) in 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501a, and then determines whether or not the forced special release flag of the first special symbol is on. (Step S551a). The forced removal flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S551a), main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with out, and turns the forced off flag into the off state. It sets (step S552a).

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the first special symbol in change is replaced by the second special symbol that is subsequently changed by the second special symbol that has been changed, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is removed. replace.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is being changed in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forcible disengagement flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a ). The forced removal flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S1111a), main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with out, and turns the forced out flag into the off state. The setting is made (step S1112a). In addition, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is not included in the collision determination process at the start of the change (step S307a of the first change start process) It is the result.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the out-of-stop symbol determined in the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, when the first special symbol in fluctuation is replaced by the second special symbol which is subsequently fluctuated by the second special symbol started to be fluctuated, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol than the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol When the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with the removal.

[Second variation start process]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second change start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second variation start processing (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  After the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the processing of step S307b, it is compared with the variation of the first special symbol whether or not this variation of the second special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player. The second priority determination process to be determined is executed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S308b and ends the present processing.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart of a second priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-described second change start process (FIG. 171).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the first special symbol is changing (step S361 b). Then, if there is no first special symbol being changed (NO in step SS361 b), this processing is ended since there is no comparison object.

  If there is the first special symbol in motion (YES in step S 361 b), main control MPU 4100 a acquires the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol in motion (step S 362 b). It compares with the result of the hit determination processing in step S307b of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

  If the second special symbol is advantageous for the player (YES in step S364 b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first special symbol is a result of detachment (step S365 b). Then, if the result is an out result (YES in step S 365 b), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a result of losing, that is, if it is a result of big hit (NO in step S365b), a forced removal flag for forcibly disengaging the first special symbol is set in the on state (step S366b). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is advantageous to the player (NO in step S364 b), main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol to be out of step (step S367b). ), End this processing.

  Thus, in the second priority determination process, if there is a first special symbol that is changing when the change is started with the second special symbol, it is determined which change result is advantageous for the player, If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is the disengaging result. If the second special symbol is not the advantageous result, the second special symbol is the disapproval result. Make sure that the game does not occur twice with the special symbol.

[Process during second change]
FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second variation in process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  After determining that the variation time of the second special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced second flag of the second special symbol is on. (Step S551 b). The forced removal flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S 366 a of the above-described first priority determination process (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S 551 b), main control MPU 4100 a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with out, and turns the forced off flag into the off state. The setting is made (step S 552 b).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502 b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the second special symbol in fluctuation is replaced by the first special symbol that is subsequently fluctuated by the first special symbol, the stop symbol determined at the start of fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is torn off replace.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is being changed in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forcible disengagement flag of the second special symbol is on (step S1111b ). The forced removal flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state in the process of step S 366 a of the above-described first priority determination process (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S1111 b), main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with out, and turns the forced out flag into the off state. The setting is made (step S1112b). In addition, when the forced removal flag of the second special symbol is not in the on state (NO in step S1111 b), the second special symbol is not included in the collision determination process at the start of the change (step S307 b of the second change start process). It is the result.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the out-of-stop symbol determined in the process of step S307 b or step S1112 b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113 b). Therefore, it is a case where the second special symbol in change is replaced by the first special symbol which is later changed by the first special symbol started to change, and the change stop of the first special symbol is more than the change stop timing of the second special symbol. When the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with the removal.

  Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

  As described above, the special symbol whose forced release flag is set to the on state is replaced with the shift stop symbol at the change stop timing. Since such special symbols are the stop symbols before replacement (a small hit, a big hit), the display content (such as reach effect) of characters etc displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the change stop time There may be a sense of incongruity with the display content of the For example, it is unnatural if it suddenly switches to defeat although the character on the player's side is superior in battle production and is near the victory. Since many players recognize the variation result by effect display such as a character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is desirable to avoid the unnaturalness (uncomfortable feeling) that occurs in the transition of the effect display.

  Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the process of delaying the variation result notification timing (effect indication representing a misplacement) of the special symbol by the effect indication of the character or the like in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is delayed from the variation stop timing of the special symbol. Run.

[Forced off stage production addition processing]
FIG. 175 (A) is a flow chart showing a procedure of forced removal effect addition processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The forced removal effect addition processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a of peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the forced release flag is set to the on state with respect to the special symbol replaced with the stop symbol which is hit and stopped at the variation stop timing. When the forced release flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the off state (NO in step S3321), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the forced control flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on in the peripheral control MPU 4140a (YES in step S3321), the special symbol for which the forced release flag is set on is It is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an object to be variably displayed (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol varies in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. Then, when the special symbol whose forced removal flag is set to the on state is not a target to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4140a adds the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the special symbol whose forced release flag is set to the on state is a target to be variably displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322). An out-of-box notification effect is set (step S3323), and the process ends.

  Here, the additional release notification effect is an effect (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in the battle effect of the character) informing the deviation in a predetermined period by the effect display such as a character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Show. The display contents excluding the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

  FIG. 175 (B) is a timing chart of the special symbol variation and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional release notification effect is set in the above-described forced release effect addition processing.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that switches from the hit stop symbol to the off stop symbol at the change stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the effect during change is a game It is highly likely that the effect is that the player is expected (a character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). Even if such an effect is being executed, it is unnatural when the out-of-focus confirmation effect (defeat of the player's character) is executed suddenly at the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, an additional out-of-focus notification effect is executed after the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the transition from the expected effect (predominant) to the expected effect (defeat) to be the effect transition without a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to provide the effect in which the player does not feel a sense of incongruity (unnaturalness).

<Effect by priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the special symbol that derives an advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed by comparing the result derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is Since the variation stop is performed with the out pattern, the special symbol for deriving the big hit by the variation stop timing as in the basic control pattern is not processed into the removal result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original game characteristics (game characteristics) of the gaming machine than the basic control pattern.

  In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the special symbol that derives an advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Not limited to. When deriving a big hit together, priority may be given to the special symbol that has started changing first, or the priority result may be ranked according to the game mode, and the special symbol to be prioritized may be determined according to the rank. .

  In addition, when the effect of the special symbol which is forced to be distracted is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the additional disapproval notification effect is set so as to end the character display effect delayed from the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Thereby, even if the effect display accompanying the hit result can be transitioned to the effect display for deriving the outlier result, it is possible for the player who reads the result from the effect display such as a character or the like to recognize the outlier without discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the strange effect presentation.

<Suspend control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed by the hit result that one special symbol is derived, the other special symbol stops the fluctuation, and features a control structure that resumes the remaining fluctuation after the corresponding game is over. Do.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the on state in the processing of step S100a. In the first embodiment described above, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol in the outlying symbol forcibly, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the first (2) Since the game on the side of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) while the hit game is being performed on the side of the special symbol, no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends the present process when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the first embodiment described above, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the out-of-place symbol is executed, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment (1) While the hit game is being performed on the special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, although the other special symbol suspends fluctuation with the occurrence of a hit game on the side of one special symbol, the corresponding game will continue if the effect performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after resumption There is a possibility that it may not be appropriate as a later effect.

  Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the restart effect changing process is executed to change the effect after restart of the interrupted special symbol from the specified effect which has been selected at the start of fluctuation and has been performed before the interruption.

[Resume effect change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the restart effect changing process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The restart effect change processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a hit is currently being played (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the interlock flag is set to the on state at the start of the hit game, and is set to the off state at the end. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the on state. If the hit game is not in progress (NO in step S3331), there is no suspended change to be subjected to the effect change, and the process ends.

  Next, if the hit is a hit game (YES in step S3331), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether there is a suspended change (step S3332). This may be determined whether the first processing flag or the second processing flag is "2". The first processing flag or the first processing is performed when the first processing during fluctuation (FIG. 129) or the second processing during fluctuation (FIG. 137) is performed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating) The 2 processing flag is set to "2". Then, if there is no suspended change (NO in step S3332), this process is ended because there is no target of the effect change.

  Next, if there is a suspended fluctuation (YES in step S3332), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the fluctuation is a hit (step S3333). Then, if it is a hit (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether the hit is more advantageous to the player than the hit currently being played (step S3334). Here, the judgment as a hit that is advantageous for the player may be a benefit that can be obtained by the player, a predetermined priority, etc., as in the determination of which special symbol to prioritize in the above-mentioned priority control pattern. Be done accordingly.

  When peripheral control MPU 4140a derives a winning game advantageous to the player than the currently-running fluctuation game (YES in step S3334), step-up effect as an effect after resumption Are set (step S3335), and the process ends.

  In addition, when the surrounding control MPU 4140a derives a hit game which is not the same as the currently running hit game (NO in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a bonus effect as the effect after resumption (step S3336), this processing ends.

  In addition, when the suspended control derives a release (NO in step S3333), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a related effect as the effect after resumption (step S3337), and ends the present process.

[Example of resuming production]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects after restart in the restart effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, the second special symbol variation that derives the hit first is executed, and at the stop timing of the variation, the variation of the first special symbol to be started later is interrupted leaving the remaining time t as an example. Explain to.

  Case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, and then big hit B occurs due to the first special symbol. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to a change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, a step-up effect that appears to have evolved from small hit C to big hit B is set to be executed . Specifically, the wave after the small hit game changes to a rough wave, and the effect that a big hit arrives is performed.

  Case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, the big hit A occurs due to the previous second special symbol, and then the big hit B occurs due to the first special symbol. In the jackpot A of the second special symbol and the jackpot B of the first special symbol, the jackpot A of the second special symbol is provided with advantageous benefits for the player. In this case, it is as if the big hit game of the first special symbol was granted accompanying the big hit game of the second special symbol as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after reopening. Set the bonus effect to be shown to be executed. Specifically, a rough wave after a big hit game is once settled and changed to a rough wave again, and an effect that a big hit arrives is performed. In addition, in the bonus effect, particularly when the interruption variation derives a small hit, the release timing of the big winning opening 2103 at the small hit game is notified by countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. A small hit game can be shown as an additional benefit added to the hit game which is executed at the time of fluctuation interruption.

  As described above, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the first special symbol side hit game and the second special symbol side hit game are a series of hits (the action of the attack device 2100 in the double hit game is a series of actions). The production is made to appear as if it were there. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the rendition after resuming becomes the rendition which is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to show the successive hits in a series of hits to enhance the interest, so the game is highly playable. A game can be provided.

  Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, a small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, but the first special symbol to be interrupted at this time is the disengaging result. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to a change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, a related effect such as an aftermath of a small hit game (such as expecting development from a small hit game) Set to run. Specifically, after the small hit game, a wave rises temporarily but returns gently, and an effect is performed without shifting to a new hit game.

  In the case where the suspended change derives the out result as in the case (C) described above, a rendering effect that brings relevance to the front and back hit games such as step-up effects and bonus effects can not be obtained. , May resume the fluctuation.

  In the following, with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181, as a modification of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern which ends the fluctuation without restarting when the interrupted fluctuation is derived will be described. Do. A different control process will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a first interlocking setting process in a modification of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol already determined at the start of the change of the first special symbol is off. (Step S1121a). Then, if it is an off (YES in step S1121a), the determined off symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). Then, the process concerning the fluctuation | variation stop of a 1st special symbol is performed by the process after step S1004a.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a continues the current state, that is, the aforementioned interruption, when the determined stop symbol of the first special symbol in change is not the disjunction, that is, it is the hit (NO in step S1121a). As in the control pattern, the process is temporarily stopped (suspended state) (step S1021a), and the process ends.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second interlocking setting process in a modification of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol already determined at the start of the change of the second special symbol is off. (Step S1121 b). Then, if it is an off (YES in step S1121 b), the determined off symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122 b). Then, the process concerning the fluctuation | variation stop of a 2nd special symbol is performed by the process after step S1004 b.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a continues the current state, ie, the above-mentioned interruption, when the determined stop symbol of the second special symbol in change is not a disconnection, that is, a hit (NO in step S1121b). As in the control pattern, the process is temporarily stopped (suspended state) (step S1021b), and the process ends.

  Thus, in the modification of the suspension control pattern of this embodiment, the control for forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the variation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits in the above-mentioned basic control pattern, and suspension The combination control with the control to temporarily stop the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one hit in the control pattern and to restart after the corresponding game is performed.

  In the modified example, it is stopped only when the other special symbol comes off at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one hit, and it is interrupted when it comes to a hit. As a result, the aforementioned related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. For this reason, the restart effect due to the fluctuation interruption is either the step-up effect or the bonus effect, and it is possible to set the execution of the restart effect itself as the advance notice effect (hit determination effect) having a high degree of expectation.

<Effect by suspension control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably executed as a result based on all acquired random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the simultaneously changing special symbols is forcibly set to be disassociated regardless of the acquired random number, but in the suspension control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( There is no overturning of the hit judgment result based on random numbers. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  Further, in the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed according to the hit result that one special symbol is derived, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuation is resumed after the corresponding game is over. At this time, the effect (resumption effect) corresponding to the resumed fluctuation is newly set according to the previous and subsequent gaming situations (one winning game on the side of the special symbol and the game derived from the fluctuation). As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the user feel uncomfortable even if the suspended change is resumed. In addition, when it is possible to make it appear that the corresponding game is related to the hit game on the side of one of the special symbols by the restart effect when the suspended fluctuation derives the hit game, the interest of the game may be enhanced. it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the re-set control pattern, while a hit game is being performed according to the hit result that one special symbol is derived, the other special symbol interrupts the fluctuation, and the fluctuation interrupted after the corresponding game is reviewed according to the gaming state Control structure to resume after the

[Process during first change]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart of the first variation-in-resetting process in the second embodiment. In addition, about the process in common with the 1st process (FIG. 129) in 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the process of step S501a expires. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the OFF state before the process of step S521a (step S561a).

  Here, the re-set flag is set to the on state in the process of step S1134a of the later-described first interlocking setting process (FIG. 183). The reset flag is a flag that is set to the on state when reset setting processing is performed to reset the suspended fluctuation time according to the game state.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the first interlocked setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the reset flag is in the on state (step S1131a). When the re-set flag is on (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended) as in the above-described suspend control pattern (step S1021a). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the re-setting flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first fluctuation timer (step S1132a). Then, the obtained timer value is reset in accordance with the game state (step S1133a), and the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134a), followed by terminating the present process. Here, the processing of step S1132a to step S1134a is referred to as re-set setting processing. It should be noted that the target to be reset in the suspended fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control content that takes fluctuation time, such as fluctuation pattern.

  As described above, in the re-set control pattern, when the change of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the re-set setting process for the change after resumption is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the off state, and is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and execution of the first variable processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, fluctuation). Is resumed).

[Process during second change]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a second variation-in-resetting process in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as in the second variation processing (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521 b until the variation time of the second special symbol in the process of step S501 b times out. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the OFF state before the process of step S521 b (step S561 b).

  Here, the re-set flag is set to the on state in the process of step S1134b of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the on state when reset setting processing is performed to reset the suspended fluctuation time according to the game state.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a second interlocking setting process in the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processing as the second interlocking setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the reset flag is in the on state (step S1131b). When the re-set flag is on (YES in step S1131 b), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended) as in the above-described suspend control pattern (step S1021 b). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the re-set flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131 b), main control MPU 4100 a acquires the timer value of the second fluctuation timer (step S1132 b). Then, the obtained timer value is reset in accordance with the gaming state (step S1133b), and the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134b), followed by terminating the present process.

  Thus, in the re-set control pattern, when the change of the second special symbol is interrupted, first, the re-set setting process for the change after resumption is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the off state, and is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second fluctuation processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, fluctuation) Is resumed).

<Effect by reset control pattern>
According to the re-set control pattern of the second embodiment, it is possible to change and execute the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated similarly to the above-mentioned interruption control pattern as a result based on the acquired random numbers. Therefore, the re-set control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  In addition, the re-set control pattern changes the remaining fluctuation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the game state. Here, the change interruption of the special symbol is caused by the hit game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode after the corresponding game has been shifted to another game mode. Therefore, when the fluctuation due to the fluctuation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is resumed as it is, the player may feel discomfort. Therefore, according to the re-set control pattern, the control content such as the fluctuation time is reviewed with respect to the fluctuation to be resumed after the hit game, so that the fluctuation corresponding to the gaming state to be executed is provided without giving the player a sense of discomfort. be able to. In addition, since the degree of freedom in the rendition at the time of resumption increases more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Specifically, it may be reviewed in accordance with the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described above (FIG. 154 (E)). For example, if the variation leading out of the second special symbol out results are interrupted, if the game mode after transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it will be reset to long-time variation, and the game mode after transition will rush In the case of the mode, it may be reset to a short time fluctuation.

  Also, if the game mode is the rush mode, I would like to digest the number of times ST and make the small hit C and small hit D of the second special symbol occur frequently. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 186, the reset setting in the case where the first special symbol for deriving a big hit occurs in a state where the number of STs remains in the rush mode will be described.

  FIG. 186 is a timing chart for explaining the reset setting process of the interruption variation in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. As described above, when the first special symbol for deriving the big hit is generated with the number of ST remaining in the rush mode, the first special symbol of the first special symbol is preferably digested after as many times as the number of ST given in the current game I want to welcome a big hit game (ie, grant of new ST number).

  Therefore, when a big hit fluctuation occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining ST number is less than a predetermined number (here, less than 5), the big hit fluctuation is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol The fluctuation time after restart, which is reset when it is set, is set to t1 for a long time. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which a small hit game can be expected to occur.

  Then, while the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol resumes the fluctuation of t1 for a long time, the small hitting fluctuation of the second special symbol occurs, and the stop timing of the small hitting fluctuation is reached. And again, the big hit fluctuation is interrupted. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short fluctuation of 1 second (Fig. 154 (E)), so the ST number is digested with good tempo.

  Then, when the number of remaining STs is one, the fluctuation time after restart to be reset is set to the short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time that does not end the fluctuation even if the second special symbol fluctuation in which the number of times of ST becomes 0 is generated is there. As a result, the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol causing frequent interruptions can be stopped in the definite change state determined to be the big hit result, that is, the ST number is effective, thus disturbing the original gameplay of the gaming machine I have not.

  As described above, according to the re-set control pattern, the fluctuation time after the fluctuation resumption of the special symbol to be interrupted can be adjusted according to the gaming state, and therefore, not only the fluctuation control of the special symbol to be interrupted, The variation efficiency of the special symbol in the gaming state can also be adjusted. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly cope with various game possibilities, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the re-set control pattern as well as the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, the presentation (resumption presentation) corresponding to the resumed fluctuation is played before and after the game situation (one special symbol side hit game and the game for which the fluctuation is derived) By setting a new setting in accordance with the above, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the user feel uncomfortable. In addition, when it is possible to make it appear that the corresponding game is related to the hit game on the side of one of the special symbols by the restart effect when the suspended fluctuation derives the hit game, the interest of the game may be enhanced. it can.

  As described above, according to the present invention, a control structure employing one or a combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the re-set control pattern described in the first and second embodiments is provided. Between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, it is possible to prevent the specific game (small hit game, big hit game) from being generated redundantly, and to allow simultaneous change. Here, even if winning of the game ball to the winning area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are on standby state to the winning area. The difference between the winning tempo of the game ball (i.e., the game tempo of the player) and the lottery game tempo causes a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present invention, the simultaneous change control can prevent the above-mentioned decrease in the interest of the game.

Third Embodiment
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. In the above-described basic control pattern and priority control pattern, when simultaneous fluctuations occur, one special figure fluctuation that has fluctuated according to the set fluctuation pattern is shifted and stopped at the end timing of the other special figure fluctuation. Cases arise. Then, when the effect relating to one special figure fluctuation is executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the fluctuation is suddenly stopped and the effect is ended, so that the player who is looking at the effect feels strange. , There is a concern to reduce the interest of the game. In particular, when a highly expected performance is being performed, it is possible for the player to have a negative impression such as disappointment, discomfort or discouragement that the betrayal was disappointing due to the termination of the production due to the sudden stop of the fluctuation. There is sex.

  Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, effect control may be performed which can prevent a drop in the interest of the game even if the effect relating to one of the special image changes is suddenly ended by the change in fluctuation stop.

  Further, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the second embodiment described above, the effect of the special figure fluctuation (one special figure fluctuation) based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening recommended by the game mode is displayed. The sudden end of the effect may occur due to the special feature fluctuation (the other special feature fluctuation) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening not recommended by the game mode.

  Therefore, control may be performed to suppress the occurrence of winning of the game ball to the starting opening, which is not recommended in the first place, so that the effect relating to one special figure fluctuation does not end suddenly in liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, the strike prevention control is performed so that the player does not aim at the starting opening not recommended.

  In the third embodiment, referring to FIG. 187 to FIG. 190, a more detailed effect control and aiming prevention are exemplified with a game machine having a control structure capable of simultaneously changing and to which the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is applied. Control will be described.

<Effect control>
[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart of the liquid crystal display process according to the third embodiment. The same processing as that of the liquid crystal display processing (FIG. 165) of the second embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 is that the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, the normal mode (low probability non-short time state) or the lash preparation mode (high probability time short state) (NO in step S3201), If the main control MPU 4100a executes a hit change for deriving a hit result on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), a switching effect process is executed (step S3211). In the switching effect process, the predetermined effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, here, the effect regarding the fluctuation of the first special symbol side is changed to the switching effect, and the switching effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 Do.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a changes the current game mode is a rush mode (high probability non-short state) (YES in step S3201), and the main control MPU 4100a produces a hit on the first special symbol side to derive a hit result When is executed (YES in step S3205), the switching effect process is executed (step S3212). In the switching effect process, the predetermined effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the effect on the variation of the second special symbol side here is changed to the switching effect, and the switching effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Do.

  Thus, in the liquid crystal display process of the present embodiment, when the other special figure fluctuation different from the special figure fluctuation to be displayed on the liquid crystal display apparatus 1900 starts the fluctuation for deriving the hit, the liquid crystal display apparatus 1900 It is characterized in that a switching effect process is performed to switch the effect in S. from the effect relating to the special image variation to be displayed to another effect (switch effect).

  The processes of steps S3203 and S3206 in the liquid crystal display process of the second embodiment described above are also one pattern of the switching effect process. In the second embodiment, by blacking out the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a switching effect, the player is not shown to the player a position where the special view fluctuation during the effect display is forcibly stopped due to a break. As described above, since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displaying a blackout when the special figure fluctuation during the effect display is forcibly stopped by disengaging, the player is forced to be stopped due to the special figure fluctuation being disconnected. Don't let me know. By the switching effect of blackout, it is possible to provide an effect capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. Also, the blackout functions as a notice effect to predict that a hit occurs due to the other special figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to induce the player's interest in deriving a hit by the other special figure fluctuation, rather than the special figure fluctuation being displayed in the effect display being suddenly terminated by a deviating fluctuation stop. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect capable of suppressing the induction of a negative impression in the simultaneous change control (it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game).

[Switching effect processing]
FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switching effect process according to the third embodiment.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not it is the hit fluctuation of the second special symbol that has triggered the transition to the present processing (step S3221). Then, if it is the hit fluctuation of the second special symbol (YES in step S3221), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the hit change is 5 seconds remaining (step S3222). As a variation time of the second special symbol, a timer value counted in the second variation processing (FIG. 173) may be received from the main control board 4100, or a count timer provided on the peripheral control board 4010 may be provided. You may read the timer value.

  Here, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is set so that the fluctuation time is between 5 seconds and 90 seconds (see FIG. 154 (E)). Therefore, in the switching effect process of the present embodiment, control is performed to switch the effect for only 5 seconds in the remaining variation time of the second special symbol from which the winning result is derived. Until then, the effect regarding the variation of the first special symbol being displayed Display

  If the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not 5 seconds (NO in step S3222), the peripheral control MPU 4140a continues the normal display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3223). On the other hand, when the variation time of the second special symbol is 5 seconds (YES in step S3222), the normal display effect displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed instead of the first switching effect (step S3224). The first switching effect is an effect as if it were an extension of the effect up to that time, with the display effect of 5 seconds being set, and it is an effect that makes the first special symbol appear to have finished fluctuating as a result of distraction without discomfort It may be an effect of informing the hit occurrence of the second special symbol. The first switching effect may be any effect that does not induce a negative impression on the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when variation in the hit of the second special symbol occurs in the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the hit of the second special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 for displaying the first special symbol Perform a normal display effect to display the first special symbol until 5 seconds before the change stops. And if it becomes 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol, the display is switched from the display special effect of the first special symbol to the first switching effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from stopping suddenly and stopping the interest of the game from being reduced.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a is not the change in hitting of the second special symbol, that is, it is the change in hitting of the first special symbol (NO at step S3221) that triggered the transition to the main processing. The normal display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in place of the second switching effect (step S3225). The second switching effect may be, for example, an effect based on the variation pattern set by the first special symbol that derives a hit, or does it continue (extend) the effect regarding the variation of the second special symbol during display? The effect may be such as, or a specific effect set in advance.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hit variation of the first special symbol occurs in the rush mode, the second switching effect is performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in which the second special symbol is displayed at the start of the hit variation. Do. In the basic control pattern in the present embodiment (that is, the second embodiment), the second special symbol is released during the period from the start to the end of the variation of the first special symbol, so a short time when it is detached It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by making the display etc. of the liquid crystal display device 1900 display effects and the like regarding the first special symbol that derives a hit rather than the second special symbol of variation (one second). That is, even if peripheral control MPU 4140a is in a state where one special symbol is to be displayed according to the game mode, when the other special symbol derives a hit, the other special symbol for deriving the corresponding is displayed. It has a control function that can be switched to the target.

  In addition, in the switching effect process of this embodiment, the switching timing of the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the fluctuation stop predetermined time (5 seconds) of the second special symbol which is not the display target in the normal mode or the rush preparation mode. In the front, when the game mode is the rush mode, the variation start time of the first special symbol not to be displayed is set, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, it may be switched to the first switching effect at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol (see the modification described later) or the fluctuation stop predetermined of the second special symbol in the rush mode The second switching effect may be switched when the time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is reached. In addition, when the hit special figure fluctuation which becomes the opportunity of the change timing of production in game mode occurs, when the fluctuation time of the corresponding special figure fluctuation is longer than the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation under display production, it indicates You may make it switch production | presentation after the special figure fluctuation in production | presentation completion (refer the modification mentioned later).

[Timing chart of switching effect control]
Subsequently, an example of effect transition of the switching effect control in the above-described liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a timing chart explaining the switching effect control of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 189 (A), in the conventional (first embodiment) normal mode and rush preparation mode, the display target in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the first special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol which is a small hit is generated when the variation of the first special symbol is displayed in the effect (special effect 1) with a high degree of expectation (special effect 1), the special displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (1) The effect ends suddenly at the timing when the corresponding fluctuation stops and stops at the stop.

  FIG. 189 (B) is a timing chart explaining an example of the first switching effect of this embodiment. If the second special symbol which is a small hit occurs when the first special symbol outlier change is executed in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the liquid crystal display device 5 seconds before the small hit fluctuation stops The display at 1900 is switched from the special effect 1 to the first switching effect. For example, the first switching effect is a pseudo effect 1 effect having an effect pattern that leads to a result without a sense of discomfort from the special effect 1 having a high degree of expectation, using the same characters as the special effect 1 displayed up to now . Since the variation corresponding to the special effect 1 is led to the unintended result through such first switching effect, the player does not feel discomfort.

  Further, FIG. 189 (C) is a timing chart explaining an example of the second switching effect of the present embodiment. If the first special symbol that is a big hit occurs when the second special symbol outlier change is executed in the rush mode, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the special effect 2 to the second at the same time the big hit variation starts Switch to switching effects. For example, the second switching effect is a special effect corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol that is a big hit. The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the rush mode is intended to display the game of the second special symbol side, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is a short time fluctuation (1 second), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol which is a big hit The variation of the second special symbol is always out during. Therefore, if the second switching effect different from the special effect is performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the interest of the game is enhanced.

[Modification of switching effect execution processing]
In addition, in the switching effect execution process of the present embodiment (FIG. 188), in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the first switching from the normal display effect to the first switching when the variation time of the second special symbol for deriving a hit becomes 5 seconds. Switch to production. Moreover, in rush mode, it switches from a normal display effect to the 2nd switching effect at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of the 1st special symbol which derives | hangs a hit. On the other hand, in the modified example, switching to the first switching effect at the start of variation of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and the remaining variation of the second special symbol while the variation time of the first special symbol is displayed in the rush mode If it is longer than the fluctuation time, it is characterized by switching to the second switching effect after the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is over.

  FIG. 190 (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switching effect execution process of the modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 190 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the first switching effect determination table. The same processing as that of the liquid crystal display processing (FIG. 188) of the third embodiment is given the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 triggers the transition to the main processing is the hit variation of the second special symbol (YES in step S3221), based on the first switching effect determination table The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the first switching effect determined (step S3231).

  In the first switching effect determination table, as shown in FIG. 190 (B), the effect patterns are set in association with the variation time (5 seconds to 90 seconds) of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, respectively. ing. The effect pattern (for example, A to F) according to the touch variation time of the second special symbol that triggered the transition to this processing may be an effect whose aspect is determined in advance, or the effect that has been displayed so far It may be an effect that appears as if it is an extension.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a is not the change in hitting of the second special symbol, that is, it is the change in hitting of the first special symbol (NO at step S3221) that triggered the transition to the main processing. Then, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3232). And, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the hit of the first special symbol is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol being displayed (NO in step S3232), the fluctuation start of the first special symbol as in this embodiment Sometimes, the display effect is switched from the normal display effect to the second switching effect (step S3225). In addition, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode of this embodiment is 1 second, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 1 to 30 seconds, so in the specifications of this embodiment It is determined that the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is always longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol being displayed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a terminates the variation of the second special symbol when the variation of the variation of the hit of the first special symbol is longer than the remaining variation time of the second special symbol being displayed (YES in step S3232). Until (NO at step S3233), the normal display effect (effect on the second special symbol) is continued (step S3234). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is finished (YES in step S3233), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched from the normal display effect to the second switching effect (step S3225).

  As described above, in the modified example, the second special symbol is preferentially displayed until the variation of the second special symbol being displayed is stopped in the rush mode, and is switched to the second switching effect after the stop in the off state. At this time, although the first special symbol starts to change, it may be switched to the fluctuation pattern effect set based on the hit fluctuation of the first special symbol being changed as the second switching effect.

<Effect of switching effect control>
According to the switching effect control in the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the third embodiment, the variation in the special symbol based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening not recommended in the current game mode, that is, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not to be displayed When the hit fluctuation occurs, the default effect of the special view fluctuation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in place of another effect (switch effect) different from the default effect. The timing to switch the effect may be the start time of the hit variation, or may be when the change period of the hit variation has become a predetermined time. As a result, the player is not shown a scene where the variation on display is suddenly terminated and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the second embodiment described above, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out as the switching effect. Also in this case, the player does not show the scene in which the variation on the display ends suddenly and stops. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, as in the switching effect control of the modified example, the remaining fluctuation time of the special image fluctuation during display is the timing at which the predetermined effect of the special image fluctuation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to another effect (switching effect). Is taken as the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation being displayed, only when it is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation which becomes the execution trigger of this processing. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not have a scene where the fluctuation during display suddenly ends and ends at the stop. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game.

<Striking prevention control>
Next, a description will be given of the shooting prevention control for preventing the player from aiming the starting opening not recommended for the game mode. The above is the effect control for preventing the decrease in interest of the game when there is a hit variation based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening not recommended, which is a countermeasure on the peripheral control board 4010 side. Here, it is control which suppresses the occurrence itself of the hit variation based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening which is not recommended from the beginning, and the measures on the main control board 4100 side are listed.

[1. Fluctuation time]
First, the variation time of the special symbol not recommended for the game mode may be set to a long time. As a result, even if the game ball is made to win in the starting opening not recommended by the player, the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol does not end when it starts, so the fluctuation efficiency is poor, resulting in stagnation of the game. As described above, by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the unrecommended starting opening, aiming shooting is prevented.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode which recommends “left-handed”, the small hit occurrence probability is high by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to a long time. If the player strikes the right, the aim starting of the second starting opening 2102 that can be easily won is prevented.

[2. Number of fluctuation patterns]
Also, a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) of special symbols not recommended for the game mode may be set. As a result, it becomes difficult to predict the timing at which the special symbol which is not recommended will stop fluctuating, so it is also difficult for the player to aim for the opening of the special winning opening 2103 due to the hit and obtain a winning ball even if it is a hit. As described above, by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the unrecommended starting opening, aiming shooting is prevented.

  Specifically, in the above-described second embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times of the second special symbol are set in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode which recommend “left-handed”. In the case of the fluctuation for deriving the hit, a plurality of values are set between 5 seconds and 90 seconds, and in the case of the fluctuation for deriving the outset, it is set to 600 seconds. A plurality of variation patterns of the second special symbol are provided corresponding to a plurality of variation times (for example, 50 patterns), and "right-handed" is continued aiming at the second starting opening 2102 which has a high probability of occurrence of hitting and can be easily won. Even if winning balls are won, the variation pattern mode (variation time, number of patterns) is set to be disadvantageous to the player. It is set such that the number of game balls hit by "right-handed" is greater than the number of game balls obtained even when winning balls are obtained by hitting the second special symbol. As described above, by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the unrecommended starting opening, aiming shooting is prevented. In addition, the fluctuation efficiency can be reduced by including a long fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern, which makes the above-mentioned effect more effective.

[3. Large winning opening opening form and board structure]
Further, in the gaming board of this embodiment (see FIG. 152), when the player aims at the large winning opening 2103 and strikes the gaming ball (that is, when "right hitting"), the gaming ball is struck to the gaming area After that, the predetermined time until winning in the special winning opening 2103 is longer than the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 by the small hit. Thus, even if the special winning opening 2103 is opened based on the small hitting fluctuation due to entering the starting opening not recommended, the player confirms the opening of the special winning opening 2103 and performs the launching operation of the gaming ball. Then, the launched game ball is not in time for the opening of the big winning opening 2103. Since the big winning opening 2103 has been opened by the time the hit game ball reaches the big winning opening 2103, it is difficult for the player to aim for the opening of the big winning opening 2103 and obtain a winning ball. As described above, by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the unrecommended starting opening, aiming shooting is prevented.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 based on the small hit is 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the game area where the game ball can roll at this time, it takes about 3 seconds as the predetermined time for the game ball hit by the player to aim at the big winning hole 2103 to reach the big winning hole 2103. A rolling inhibiting member (not shown) is disposed to inhibit rolling to the special winning opening 2103. Here, the rolling inhibiting member is a member for reducing the rolling speed of the gaming ball rolling toward the big winning opening 2103. For example, it may be a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, or may be convex ribs. Alternatively, the movable piece may be a movable piece which is constantly moved with a constant period shorter than the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 based on the small hit. The movable piece is movably controlled by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100, and restricts the rolling of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 2103.

<Effect of aiming control>
According to the aim prevention control of the third embodiment, the game mode (long time setting of fluctuation time, plural fluctuation time settings) is set according to the game mode as a countermeasure on the main control board 4100 side. In addition, the winning efficiency to the special winning opening 2103 is lowered by adjusting the rolling inhibiting member and the game mode (opening time of the special winning opening) in the game area. As a result, when aiming at the starting opening not recommended for the game mode, the variation efficiency is lowered, or the number of game balls shot against the number of game balls won is large, which is a disadvantage to the player. It can be set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a striking operation (aim hitting) aiming at a starting opening not recommended to the player.

<Mobile Role Control>
In addition, with regard to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effects performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 may be accompanied by the operation of the movable part. If the movement of the movable character is continued with the effect mode corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the special symbol suddenly changes at the stop timing of fluctuation of the other special symbol not to be displayed. When the process is ended, the display screen is covered by the movable role, and the determined symbol (variation result) may not be visible to the player.

  Therefore, even if the display timing of the variation result in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed in relation to the above-mentioned effect control (FIGS. 187 to 190), the movable role covers the result display and obstructs the player's view Movable role control may be performed so as not to do so.

  In the third embodiment, referring to FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, the movable service effect processing performed when the effect of the movable character is included in the special symbol-side effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Will be explained.

[Movable role presentation processing]
FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing a procedure of movable role feature presentation processing in the third embodiment. The movable role product effect process is one of the effect control process (step S3102) of the 16 ms steady process (FIG. 151) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010, and is repeatedly executed every 16 ms.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether the movable combination flag is on (step S3301). The movable role flag is set to the on state when indicating that the movable role is to be operated in the effect. Then, if the movable combination flag is off, that is, if the movable combination is not operated (NO in step S3301), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the movable part flag is on (YES in step S3301), peripheral control MPU 4140a drives the motor or the like in the effect mode according to the command (fluctuation pattern command etc.) received from main control board 4100. Control is performed to control the device to operate the movable part (step S3302). The command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed in the above-described command analysis process (step S3101, FIG. 151). The aforementioned movable part flag is set to the on state as required in this command analysis process.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not a variation for deriving a hit has occurred on the special symbol side that is not the display target of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3303). Specifically, when the current game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the variation of the second special symbol for deriving a hit starts during the presentation of the first special symbol requiring the operation effect of the movable role this time It is determined whether it has been done. Here, it may be determined whether or not the forced special release flag of the first special symbol has been turned on. Similarly, when the current game mode is the rush mode, it is determined whether or not the variation of the first special symbol for deriving a hit has been started during the rendering of the second special symbol. Here, it may be determined whether or not the forced off flag of the second special symbol has been turned on.

  Next, in the case where a new hit change has been started (performed) (YES in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes detection of the origin of the movable role (step S3304). The origin detection is processing for detecting the origin state in order to determine whether or not there is a movable part at the origin (initial position) indicating that it is in a stationary state (accommodated state).

  When it is determined that the movable combination is at the origin (YES in step S3305), that is, when the movable combination is at the initial position, peripheral control MPU 4140a prohibits the operation of the movable combination (step S3306). Then, the movable role flag is set to the off state (step S3310), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined that the movable part is at the origin (NO in step S3305), that is, if the movable part is in the operating state, peripheral control MPU 4140a is detected in the process of S3303 described above. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation is 5 seconds remaining (step S3307). Here, the time required for the movable part to return to the initial position from the maximum movement position where it has operated the most is 5 seconds. The remaining time determined in the process of step S3307 may be the maximum time required for the movable part to return to the initial position.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the movable role to the origin (step S3308) when the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds (YES in step S3307). Then, the movable role flag is set to the off state (step S3310), and the process ends.

  Further, if the fluctuation time is not 5 seconds, that is, if the fluctuation time is longer than 5 seconds (NO in step S3307), peripheral control MPU 4140a continues the rendering operation by the movable character, and step S3308 described later Transfer to processing of

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that a new hit change has not been started (NO in step S3303) and the remaining change time is longer than 5 seconds after the start change (NO in step S3307). And the effect operation by the movable combination is continued, and it is determined whether the operation has ended (step S3309). Then, if the operation has not ended yet (NO in step S3309), the present processing ends.

  If the operation of the movable combination is ended (YES in step S3309), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the movable combination flag to the off state (step S3310), and ends the present process.

  In the process of step S3307 described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol which is not the display target of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is 5 seconds. This is to secure the maximum time (5 seconds) required for the movable character in operation to reliably return to the home position (initial position) in the variation of the special symbol to be displayed, and forcibly stopping the variation during display It is premised that the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation which is the trigger of the operation is set to the maximum time or more. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode is set to 5 seconds or more, but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the rush mode is set to 1 to 30 seconds . Therefore, the fluctuation time for deriving the first special symbol in the rush mode is set to 5 to 30 seconds.

  In the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode (when the display target is the first special symbol) and the hit variation occurs on the second special symbol side, The normal display effect (effect of the first special symbol side) is performed until the remaining time of the hit variation is 5 seconds, and switching to the first switching effect is performed when the remaining time is 5 seconds. Therefore, also in this process, the movable special effects that were operating as the effects of the first special symbol side until the remaining time of the variation of the second special symbol reaches 5 seconds so as to follow the display content in the liquid crystal display device 1900 The movable part is returned to the origin before the fluctuating stop, but the invention is not limited to this. In the switching effect process of the modified example (FIG. 190 (A)), the first switching by the effect pattern (FIG. 190 (B)) according to the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation at the time when the hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. Switch to production. In response to this, the movable part may be returned to the origin at the time when the variation of the second special symbol starts to change, and the effect pattern of the movable part is displayed in the effect pattern (FIG. 190 (B)). If set, the movable combination may be operated as the first switching effect. In addition, when the game mode is rush mode (when the display target is the second special symbol) and the hit variation occurs on the first special symbol side, the display content is changed to the second switching effect from the start of the hit variation. It has switched (refer FIG. 188). In this process, in the same situation, the movable character continues the usual operation effects as before, and is made to return to the origin (stop the movement) just before the first special symbol stops at the hit. Not exclusively. When the change of the first special symbol is started, the action effect of the movable combination corresponding to the change of the first special symbol may be performed as the second switching effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the movable combination control by the processing of steps S3303 to S3308 is performed in the movable combination rendering process repeatedly executed every 16 ms, but the present invention is not limited to this. These processes may be performed as independent processes, and may be performed as triggered by reception of the ON state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol from the main control board 4100 side.

[Example of production transition]
FIG. 192 is an example of effect transition which describes movable combination control of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (A), the movable role is normally accommodated on the back side of the game board 4 and on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to be invisible to the player. Here, the movable part is movable in the left and right direction. When the movable left and right movable objects move to the center of the screen as much as possible, the front of the display screen is completely covered, and the player can not view the display screen.

  When the movable part starts to operate from the origin, two doors (movable parts) appear from the left and right of the liquid crystal display device 1900 toward the center of the screen. At this time, even if there is a hit variation in which a hit is derived on the side of the special symbol not to be displayed, the movable role continues moving toward the center of the screen until the variation time of the corresponding change becomes 5 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (B), when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol side not to be displayed in the current game mode is 5 seconds, the two doors (movable combination) are set up to that time Stop the operation according to the effect mode being performed and start the operation to return to the origin. Therefore, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched from the covered state (the invisible state) to the visible state according to the operation of returning to the origin of the movable part. Here, the timing at which the operation of returning to the origin is started is set so that the movable part can return from the maximum movable position to the origin before the variation result is displayed.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 192C, when the variation result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the movable role returns to the origin. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the variation result, the movable role does not cover the display screen and disturb it.

<Effect of mobile role control>
According to the movable character object control of the third embodiment, when the change stop timing is determined not by the special symbol side game to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 but by the game by the other special symbol side, the other side At the start of fluctuation of the special symbol side, origin detection is performed to determine whether the movable combination is at the origin, and operation control of the movable combination in the future is determined. If it is determined that the movable part is at the origin, the movement of the movable part is inhibited, and if it is not determined that the movable part is at the origin, the origin before the fluctuation of the other special symbol side is stopped Back to. As a result, since the movable combination is always at the origin (accommodation state) at the time of the fluctuation stop, there is a concern that the movable combination covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the player can not visually recognize the symbol determination. It can be eliminated.

<State transition control>
The game mode of the present invention includes a normal mode (low probability non-short state), a rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) and a rush mode (high probability non-short state), and the game mode is the lash preparation mode and the rush mode When it rushes in, ST number of times is given 70 times. Then, when the variation is completed 70 times without generating a big hit in each mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode (see FIG. 155).

  Here, the transition of the game mode is normally performed at the end of the game executed in the current game mode. Specifically, in the rush preparation mode or in the rush mode, transition to the normal mode is triggered by the end of the 70th fluctuation in which the big hit lottery was performed in the definite change state. In addition, when the fluctuation which derives the hit occurs before reaching 70 times, it shifts to the other game mode through the hit game concerning the fluctuation. Then, the internal control at this time sets the game mode by the main control board 4100 turning on / off the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the peripheral control board 4010 sets the state designation command from the main control board 4100 when the change is determined. An effect corresponding to the game mode set by receiving is executed. The peripheral control substrate 4010 displays the current remaining number of STs on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with respect to the number of STs counted on the main control substrate 4100 side.

  However, as shown in FIG. 201A, which will be described later, in the basic control pattern as in the present embodiment (if one is a hit and the change is the other change started during the change, it will be a gap in no lottery). When one out of the special symbols, the ST number is 70 times and the out-of-date variation is started, the other special symbol does not perform the change, and after the out-of-date variation starts the change in the other special symbol In this case, the jackpot lottery (judgment) is executed in a high probability state even though the variation of the other special symbol has already ended the ST number. As described above, in a control structure in which two special symbol variations can be simultaneously varied, there may occur a case in which one is a variation of a definite variation target and the other is a variation that is not a definite variation variation even if the variation occurs at the same timing.

  Therefore, state transition control may be performed such that the appropriate number of fluctuations is determined in a high probability state in the game mode to which the probability change function is provided. Specifically, the present embodiment is characterized in that the stop timing (state transition timing) of the probability variation function accompanying the ST frequency digestion is performed at the start of fluctuation, not at the end of the 70th fluctuation. The state transition control of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 193A to 201.

[First change start process]
FIG. 193A and FIG. 193B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the third embodiment. The same processing as the first variation start processing (FIG. 157) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes processing (steps S331a to S336a) of setting a state designation command before executing the processing of step S309a.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the number of times of ST updated by the process of step S303a has become 0 (step S331a). Then, if the number of times of ST has become 0 (YES in step S331a), the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S332a), and the process proceeds to step S333a. When the number of times of ST is not 0 (NO in step S331a), the process proceeds to step S333a.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the time saving function is in operation from the state of the time saving flag (step S333a). If the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S333a), it is determined whether the time saving function is to be stopped (step S334a). The time saving function of this embodiment operates when the probability change flag is in the on state, and stops when the probability change flag is in the off state. Therefore, the time saving function is stopped on the assumption that the time saving function end condition is satisfied when the probability change flag is in the OFF state (step S335a). If the time saving function is not in operation (NO in step S333a) and if the time saving function end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S334a), the process proceeds to step S336a.

  Finally, the main control MPU 4100a sets a state instruction command including information such as the ON / OFF state of the probability change flag and the short time flag, and the number of remaining STs (step S336a), and proceeds to the process of step S309a. The state instruction command set here is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 together with the change pattern command at the start of change. The peripheral control board 4010 selects and executes an effect according to the received command.

[Process during first change]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variable processing in the third embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation in processing (FIG. 129) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment (the first embodiment) is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition process (steps S331a to S336a) of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is executed in the first change start process, the same process (step S511a) conventionally performed at the time of the fluctuation stop ~ S516a) is deleted.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the third embodiment. The processing common to the first interlocking setting processing (FIG. 159) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is assigned the same reference numerals, and the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition process (steps S331a to S336a) of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is executed in the first change start process, the same process (step S1005a) conventionally performed at the time of the change stop .About.S1010a) is deleted.

[Second variation start process]
FIG. 196A and FIG. 196B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the second variation start process in the third embodiment. The same processing as that of the second variation start processing (FIG. 160) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numeral, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes processing (steps S331b to S336b) of setting a state designation command before executing the processing of step S309b.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the number of times of ST updated by the process of step S303b has become 0 (step S331b). Then, if the number of times of ST becomes 0 (YES in step S331 b), the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S332 b), and then the process proceeds to step S333 b. When the number of times of ST is not 0 (NO in step S331 b), the process proceeds to step S333 b.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the time saving function is in operation from the state of the time saving flag (step S333 b). Then, if the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S333 b), it is determined whether the time saving function is to be stopped (step S334 b). The time saving function of this embodiment operates when the probability change flag is in the on state, and stops when the probability change flag is in the off state. Therefore, the time saving function is stopped on the assumption that the time saving function end condition is satisfied when the probability change flag is in the off state (step S335b). If the time saving function is not in operation (NO in step S333 b) and if the time saving function end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S334 b), the process proceeds to step S336 b.

  Finally, the main control MPU 4100a sets a state instruction command including information such as the on / off state of the probability change flag and the short time flag, and the number of remaining STs (step S336b), and proceeds to the process of step S309b. The state instruction command set here is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 together with the change pattern command at the start of change. The peripheral control board 4010 selects and executes an effect according to the received command.

[Process during second change]
FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second variation in progress process according to the third embodiment. The processing common to the second variation in progress processing (FIG. 137) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment (first embodiment) will be assigned the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition process (steps S331b to S336b) of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is executed in the second change start process, the same process (step S511b) conventionally performed at the time of the change stop ~ S516b) is deleted.

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second small hit gaming process in the third embodiment. The same processing as that of the second small hit game processing (FIG. 162) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numeral, and the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition process (steps S331b to S336b) of the probability change flag and the short time flag is executed in the second change start process, the same process (conventional process executed at the end of the small hit game) Steps S923b to S928b) are deleted.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the third embodiment. The same processing as that of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 163) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition process (steps S331b to S336b) of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is performed in the second change start process, the same process (step S1005b) that is conventionally performed at the time of the change stop. .About.S1010b) is deleted.

[Simulation effect processing]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pseudo rendering process in the third embodiment. The pseudo effect process is one of the effect control process (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether a state designation command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3401). If the state designation command is received (YES in step S3401), the state designation command received last time is compared with the state designation command received this time (step S3402). Then, it is determined whether the probability change flag has changed from on (previous time) to off (current time) (step S3403).

  If the probability change flag is changed from on to off (YES in step S3403), the peripheral control MPU 414a executes a pseudo effect as the current fluctuation effect (step S3404). Thereafter, the process ends. The pseudo effects include, for example, effects of moving the movable part (door) at the start of the fluctuation to cover the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and returning to the origin when the change is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag has not changed from on to off (NO in step S3403), the peripheral control MPU 414a does not shift to the state transition timing, and executes normal effect as the current fluctuation effect (step S3405). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 sets a probability change flag and a time saving flag at the start of fluctuation, and transmits a state designation command to the peripheral control board 4010. For this reason, when transitioning from the rush mode to the normal mode (when the display target of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed along with the transition of the game mode), the variation of the second special symbol of the ST final round (the 70th time) is The peripheral control substrate 4010 is judged to be a fluctuation in the normal mode, and when it is originally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920.

  Therefore, in the pseudo rendering process of the present embodiment, the pseudo rendering is executed by the change when the state transition is made. As a result, the possible trouble caused by the difference between the game mode in which the change is to be executed and the game mode in the internal control is eliminated. In addition, there is no problem as long as the simulated effect is an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort due to the difference in the game mode. Further, the judgment of the state transition on the peripheral control board 4010 side is made by the process of steps S3401 to S3403 by the state designation command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of fluctuation, but it is not limited to this. When the probability state and the time saving state change, a state transition instruction command may be separately set on the main control board 4100 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. In this case, the judgment of the state transition on the peripheral control board 4010 side can be made by the presence or absence of reception of the state transition instruction command.

[State transition control timing chart]
FIG. 201 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the conventional game mode transition, and FIGS. 201 (B) and (C) are timing charts for explaining the game mode transition and the false effect of the third embodiment.

  FIG. 201A shows a case of transition from the rush preparation mode to the normal mode by conventional ST frequency digestion. In the prior art, at the time of the variation stop of the first special symbol side of the ST final round (ST = 0), the probability change flag and the time saving flag are changed and the state transition is made. For this reason, in the rush preparation mode, when the first special symbol side of the ST final round (ST = 0) starts to change, the second special symbol side change is not performed, and the first special symbol side first special variation is not performed. When the variation of the second special symbol side is started during the variation of the symbol side, the variation of the second special symbol side is determined to be a big hit in the probability variation state.

  In addition, if the first special symbol side is not out-of-out fluctuation but is hit fluctuation, the fluctuation started during the corresponding fluctuation will be a deviation in no lottery, so there will not be a fluctuation that is judged as a big hit with high probability after ST digestion . In addition, when the variation of the first special symbol side is started, if the variation of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variation that was being executed of the second special symbol is stopped, the probability variation Since the flag is turned off, there is no high probability of a hit judging change after ST digestion.

  On the other hand, FIG. 201 (B) shows about the case where it transfers to a normal mode from rush preparation mode by ST frequency | count digestion of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, at the start of variation of the first special symbol side of ST final round (ST = 0), the probability change flag and the time saving flag are changed and the state transition is made. For this reason, in the rush preparation mode, when the first special symbol side of the ST final round (ST = 0) starts to change, the second special symbol side change is not performed, and the first special symbol side first special variation is not performed. Even if the variation on the second special symbol side is started during the variation on the symbol side, the variation on the second special symbol side is determined to be a big hit in the normal state (low probability state).

  Here, since the peripheral control board 4010 receives the state designation command at the time when the change in the rush preparation mode (probable change state) is started, the command that the game mode has shifted to the normal mode (normal state) at the start of the change To analyze. For this reason, when the effect selection table is provided for each mode, the effect is selected from the effect selection table (not shown) corresponding to the normal mode although it is originally a change in the rush preparation mode (positive change state) And there is a new concern that a sense of discomfort may be produced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol side variation of the ST final round (ST = 0), that is, the variation at the time of mode transition, is not a normal effect determined based on the command received at the start of variation, but a state transition Perform a pseudo-representation taking into account the timing. This solves the problem caused by the state transition control on the main control board 4100 side.

  FIG. 201 (C) shows a case of transition from the rush mode to the normal mode by ST frequency digestion of this embodiment. In this embodiment, similarly to FIG. 201 (B), the probability change flag and the time saving flag are changed at the start of variation of the second special symbol side of the ST final round (ST = 0), and the state transition is made. Then, since the peripheral control board 4010 receives the state designation command at the time when the change in the rush mode (probable change state) is started, the command analysis is performed when the change to the normal mode (normal state) is made at the start of the change. .

  Here, the special symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 differs between the rush mode and the normal mode. Therefore, the variation on the second special symbol side of the final ST is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the rush mode but is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 in the normal mode. Switching the display (the liquid crystal display device 1900, 7-segment display 1920) before the end of the ST final fluctuation may give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the problem caused by the state transition control on the main control board 4100 side is performed by performing the pseudo-representation by the change of the second special symbol side of ST final round (ST = 0), that is, the change at mode transition. Eliminate

<Effect of state transition control>
According to the state transition control of the third embodiment, when the other fluctuation which is not the probability change object occurs during the one change which is the probability change object, the other fluctuation is not to be a big hit lottery in the high probability state At the start of one of the changes, the definite change state is ended and state transition is performed. In this way, it is possible to determine with a high probability state only the appropriate number of fluctuations in the game mode to which the probability change function is provided. In addition, in the fluctuation of the subject of probability change in which the state transition is performed at the start of the fluctuation, the pseudo effect is performed such that the player does not feel discomfort due to the difference between the game mode corresponding to the change and the game mode in internal control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a failure due to the state transition (early transition of the game mode) at the start of the change of the probability change object.

<ST display control>
Further, when the game mode shifts to the rush preparation mode (high probability time short state) and the rush mode (high probability non-short time state), the number of times of ST is given 70 times. In the rush preparation mode, the game on the first special symbol side is recommended, and in the rush mode, the game on the second special symbol side is recommended. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of STs given at the time of transition to each game mode be digested in the recommended game.

  By the way, in the rush preparation mode and the rush mode, winning of gaming balls to the special winning opening 2101 b and the second starting opening 2102 of the first starting opening 2101 is recommended by “right hitting”, respectively. In the rush preparation mode, there is a possibility that a game ball that did not win a prize at the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 will win a prize at the second starting opening 2102 downstream. In the rush mode, the game mode before transition (normal mode or rush preparation mode) recommends winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (the permanent opening 2101 a, special opening 2101 b). There is a possibility that the holding change (upper limit 4 pieces) of the first special symbol is left.

  For this reason, it is difficult to digest only by the change of the special symbol side which recommends the ST number given in each game mode. In addition, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous fluctuation state are controlled so that the other is off when one fluctuation leads to a hit, even if the two special symbols are in the simultaneous fluctuation state, ST There is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced if the number of times taken is accelerated.

  In the present embodiment, in the game mode in which the probability changing function is given by the number of STs, the display control of the number of STs capable of suppressing the decrease in interest of the game is focused on the ST number display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 visible to the player. Do. As an example, it is displayed as if the number of STs less than the number of STs actually assigned is given by a predetermined number, and a predetermined number is triggered when the number of STs subtracted according to the number of executions of fluctuation has reached the first prescribed number. An effect (adjustment effect) is performed as if the ST number of minutes was additionally given. In the following, ST display control of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203.

[ST times display process]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart of an ST count display process according to the third embodiment. The ST number display process is one of the effect control process (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether a state transition instruction command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3501). Here, the state transition instruction command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 when the state of the probability flag or the time saving flag is changed. The state transition instruction command is transmitted when the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set to the on state triggered by a big hit, or when the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set to the off state by ST number of times.

  When peripheral control MPU 414a receives a state transition instruction command (YES in step S3501), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether a positive change is to be applied (step S3502). That is, it is determined whether or not the state transition is triggered by a big hit in which the probability change flag is set to the on state. Then, if a positive change is not given (NO in step S3502), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 414a subtracts the predetermined number of STs given by liquid crystal display device 1900 or adds and displays it (step S3503) when a definite variation is given (YES in step S3502). In the example of FIG. 203 described later, a predetermined number of ST times of 70 times of the ST number of times of actual addition are subtracted and displayed as 65 times.

  When peripheral control MPU 414a does not receive the state transition instruction command (NO in step S3501), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the variation pattern command transmitted from main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received. (Step S3504). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (YES in step S3504), it is determined whether the ST counter value is larger than 0 (step S3505). A command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of fluctuation may be applied instead of the fluctuation pattern command. Further, the ST counter value may be information included in a command transmitted from the main control board 4100, or the peripheral control board 4010 may count the number of fluctuations after mode transition from the ST times provided. Good. If the variation pattern command has not been received (NO in step S3504) or if the ST counter value is 0 (NO in step S3505), this processing ends.

  If the ST counter value is larger than 0, that is, if it is a positive change state (YES in step S3505), peripheral control MPU 414a subtracts the ST counter value of liquid crystal display device 1900 by 1 (step S3506). Thereafter, it is determined whether the displayed ST counter value has reached the first prescribed number (here, 5) (step S3507). Here, if the ST counter value has not reached the first prescribed number (NO in step S3507), this processing ends, and subtraction display is repeated until the ST counter value reaches the first prescribed number.

  Then, when the ST counter value reaches the first prescribed number (here, 5) (YES in step S3507), peripheral control MPU 414a displays the actual number of STs in internal control and liquid crystal display device 1900. An adjustment effect is executed to obtain consistency with the ST counter value (step S3508). Thereafter, the process ends. The adjustment effect is an effect that accelerates the subtraction of the ST counter value or gives an insufficient number of times to match the timing when both values become 0 (zero).

[ST display control timing chart]
FIG. 203 is a timing chart explaining ST display control in the liquid crystal display device of the third embodiment. Here, the case where it transfers to rush mode on the occasion of the big hit of the 1st special symbol generated in rush preparation mode is explained to an example.

  First, at the end of the big hit game of the first special symbol generated in the rush preparation mode, the definite change flag is set to the on state, and the ST number of 70 times is given. At this time, a state transition instruction command indicating transition to the rush mode is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the notification is displayed to the player as if the number of times “65” obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times “5” from the number of times of application “70” is given based on the state transition instruction command. Here, the second special symbol variation recommended by the rush mode is calculated 65 times as the number of variations that can be performed in the probability variation state. The predetermined number "5" was subtracted as the number of times of variation of the first special symbol.

  Immediately after the rush mode is entered, the variation of the first special symbol held in the rush preparation mode is also executed. At this time, there is also an execution of the variation of the second special symbol recommended by the rush mode, and the ST count is quick to settle, but when the ST count displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 reaches the first prescribed number "5" Is performed, and an effect is performed as if ST times for a predetermined number “5” times initially subtracted are additionally given. As described above, since it is possible to make the player think that the ST count has been added when the ST count in the rush mode is completed, it is possible to prevent the series of rush modes from being reduced in interest.

  In one example, the ST number displayed first is displayed by subtracting a predetermined number from the ST number actually provided, but may be added. In the rush preparation mode, fluctuation of the second special symbol may periodically occur due to the structural arrangement relationship between the special winning opening 2101 b of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, contrary to the above-described example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed as if “90” is added a predetermined number (for example, “20”) of the ST number actually applied first. Then, a plurality of specified numbers are provided as triggers for performing the adjustment effect. For example, a predetermined adjustment period is set when the first predetermined number “70”, the second predetermined number “50”, and the third predetermined number “20” are reached, and one change is made several times during this adjustment period. Perform effects (adjustment effects) that show variation. At this time, the subtraction number of the ST number per fluctuation is fluctuated so that the difference between the actual ST number and the display number becomes gradually smaller as the ST number of digestion progresses. By such display control, the player feels that many ST times are being absorbed with good tempo, and it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in the series of rush preparation modes.

<Effect of ST display control>
According to the ST display control of the third embodiment, the peripheral control substrate 4010 performs the display of the number different from the number of STs given by the main control substrate 4100 in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, when the game mode to which the probability change function is given is ended, adjustment effects (subtraction acceleration, number of times, etc.) are executed during the game mode so that the consistency is matched. In this way, it is possible to diversify the ST effects in the game mode and to enhance the interest of the game. And, since the interest for the ST number to be digested is diminished by the fluctuation of the special symbol not recommended in the game mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the game.

Fourth Embodiment
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. In the fourth embodiment, the basic control pattern (second embodiment) for providing a non-lottery period in which the other fluctuation is shifted by non-lottery by the hit of one fluctuation that has occurred earlier, and the player of the two fluctuations. A simultaneous variation control structure having a control pattern combining a priority control pattern (the second embodiment) in which the variation resulting in an advantageous result is prioritized and the other variation is forcibly canceled, and a part of the winning area In the example of the gaming machine having a gaming area (see FIG. 204) in which the arrangement of the common drawing gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 is different from the embodiments described above, Possible game control and effect control will be described. Specifically, with regard to game control, not only the occurrence of the first big hit B (with no definite change with time reduction) but also the first big hit with A (with definite change with short time) at the transition to the high probability non-short state (lash mode). Also includes multiple occurrences of (time limit reached). Further, with regard to effect control, effects that reflect the preference of the player can be made in a round game.

[Game board]
FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. About the member which has a function common to the game board 4 (refer FIG. 114) of above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, and the game board 4 (refer FIG. 152) of 2nd Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the common drawing gate 2301 is disposed in the game area on the left side of the center character 2500, and the first start immediately below the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 provided in the lower area of the center character 2500. The special winning opening 2101 b of the opening 2101 is disposed. The movable combination (normal electric combination) 2111 for converting the special winning opening 2101b into a state in which the gaming ball is easy to win (open state) and a state in which the gaming ball can not win (closed state) is the permanent winning hole 2101a. It is provided immediately below and has the same function as that of the second embodiment described above. Therefore, when the gaming state is the high probability short time state (the rush preparation mode), the player is prompted to "left-hand". Moreover, the attacker apparatus 2100 of this embodiment is a conveyor tacker apparatus (refer FIG. 153 (A)) arrange | positioned by the above-mentioned 2nd Embodiment and the same position.

  Thus, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment and the gaming board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above and the gaming board 4 (see FIG. 152) of the second embodiment 1 Because the arrangement of the special winning opening 2101b of the starting opening 2101 is different, the difference is that the gaming area to be aimed by the player in the high probability time reduction state (lash preparation mode) is the gaming area on the left side of the center character 2500. Although there are other game characteristics (recommended game mode transition, recommended winning opening in the game mode) are the same.

[Game Summary]
FIG. 205 is a view showing transition of the gaming state (game mode) of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 206 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. is there. The game mode transition and the game specification of the present embodiment are based on the game mode transition (see FIG. 147) and the game specification (see FIG. 146) of the first embodiment described above. Here, features different from the first embodiment described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) of the present embodiment, transition to the high probability non-time short state (lash mode) is possible upon occurrence of the first big hit B or the first big hit A2. In addition, it is characterized in that transition to a high probability non-time-short state (rush mode) is possible in response to multiple occurrences of the big hit of the first big hit A (A1 or A2). Although the details will be described later, two types of a symbol A1 and a symbol A2 are provided on the first jackpot A of the present embodiment. Both the first big hit A1 and A2 in the low probability non-short time state (normal mode) is given the probability change function and the time short function, but in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) only the first big hit A1 and the positive change function The time saving function is provided, only the probability variation function is provided to the first jackpot A2, and the time reducing function is not provided. In the high probability non-time-short state (lash preparation mode), only the probability variation function is provided for both the first big hit A1 and A2, and the time saving function is not provided.

  In the present embodiment, as described above in the first embodiment, the game of the second special symbol in the high probability non-short state (lash mode) is a bonus game that can obtain a prize ball, so the player rushes into the rush mode. Expect. Therefore, not only the big hit (1st big hit B in the normal mode, the first big hit A2 / B in the rush preparation mode) occurs but the other big hits (1st big hit A in the normal mode, the first in the rush ready mode) By making multiple occurrences of one jackpot A1) also the transition to the rush mode, chances of entering the rush mode advantageous for the player can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (C), this embodiment is characterized by the jackpot specifications. As described above, in the first special symbol lottery, the first jackpot A is provided with two types of symbol A1 and symbol A2. The big hit (first big hit A1) of the symbol A1 is the same as the first big hit A of the previous embodiments in that the time saving function is given when winning in any gaming state, but the big hit of the symbol A2 ( The first big hit A2) is characterized in that the time saving function is provided only in the case of winning in the low probability non-shorting state. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving limit function is set as one of operation stop conditions in the gaming state (the rush preparation mode) in which the time saving function operates. The short time limit function executes a process ("YES" in the process of step S962 in FIG. 211 described later) to stop the operation of the time saving function when the big hit continuing the operation of the time saving function reaches a predetermined number of times (three times). Function, and the predetermined number of times is taken as the time limit number of times. Although the time-limit limit number in the present embodiment is such that the first big hit A (A1 or A2) that triggered the entry of the time-shortened state (lash preparation mode) is also counted once, it is not limited thereto.

  In the first special symbol lottery, the distribution ratios of the first big hit A1, the first big hit A2, and the first big hit B are set to 25%, 25% and 50%, respectively. In the present embodiment, since the first big hit A2 is provided in which the ability to operate the time saving function differs depending on the probability state, each game mode entry probability varies depending on the probability state. When the probability state is the normal state (normal mode), the probability of entering the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) is 50%, but the rush preparation mode is again performed in the high probability time short state after rush (lash preparation mode) There is a 25% chance of getting into In other words, the high probability short time (rush mode) entry probability in the low probability non-short state (normal mode) is 50%, and the rush mode entry probability in the rush preparation mode is 75%.

  In addition, all the big hit of the 1st special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery make the game state after the big hit game end transition to a definite change state with 100% probability, and change the special change state after the big hit game It is possible to add a probability change function which continues until the number of times is executed 165 times.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 206 (E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation of the second special symbol is performed in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. A long time fluctuation of 600 seconds to 3300 seconds.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the game ball is shot at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500 and fired (so-called "left-handed"). It is the best game method for the player to make the game ball always win a prize in the winning opening 2101a. Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a is the first big hit A (A1 or A2), the gaming state is a high probability that the probability changing function and the time saving function are provided Transition to the short time game state (rush preparation mode). In the high probability time short game state (a rush preparation mode), the game ball is allowed to pass through the regular drawing gate 2301 by aiming the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500 (so-called "left-handed") It is the best game method for the player to aim for winning the special start winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a or special installation winning opening 2101b is the first big hit B or the first big hit A2, only the probability change function is given the gaming state Transition to the high probability non-short game state (rush mode). Furthermore, since the short time limit function is provided in the present embodiment, the first big hit A occurred three times including the first big hit A (A1 or A2) that became the mode entry trigger during the rush preparation mode. Also in the case, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability non-short game state (rush mode). In the high probability non-short game state (rush mode), the game ball is shot at the right play area 1100 of the center character 2500 and fired (so-called "right-handed"), winning a prize in the second starting opening 2102 The aim of the game is the best game method for the player. Every big hit that occurs in the rush mode resets the ST number to 165 and continues the current gaming state (lash mode). In the rush preparation mode and the rush mode, when the variation is completed 165 times without occurrence of a new big hit, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode).

Control pattern
FIG. 207 is a diagram for describing an overview of control patterns of the simultaneous variation control structure of the fourth embodiment. In the present embodiment, a control pattern in which the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern in the second embodiment described above are combined is executed. Specifically, the basic control pattern (second embodiment, third embodiment) of providing a non-lottery period in which the other variation is shifted by non-lottery by the occurrence of one of the variations previously generated (the second embodiment, the third embodiment) Among them, it is a combination with a priority control pattern (second embodiment) in which a change which is advantageous to the player is prioritized and the other change is forcibly removed.

  As shown in FIG. 207, when the variation of the first special symbol that occurred earlier derives a big hit, the forced special release flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state at the same timing as the big hit determination. Thereby, even if the variation of the second special symbol occurs, the forced release flag causes a gap in no lottery. And the change of the 2nd special symbol stops shifting at the change stop timing of the 1st special symbol.

  In addition, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol that occurs earlier derives a small hit, even if it is a hit, the forced off flag of the first special symbol is not set to the on state. When the change of the first special symbol later becomes the simultaneous change state, the priority determination process is executed to determine the priority change. Here, when the variation of the first special symbol for deriving the big hit is started while the second special symbol is being changed, the priority determination process is performed and the variation of the first special symbol for deriving the big hit is prioritized It is decided. Thereby, the forced off flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is finished, the forced hit flag is replaced by the hit result and the stopped result is stopped.

<Main control>
Subsequently, characteristic control processing executed by the main control MPU 4100 a according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208A to 214. In the fourth embodiment, state transition control similar to that of the third embodiment described above is performed. Specifically, the stop timing (state transition timing) of the probability change function accompanying the ST frequency digestion is performed at the start of the 165th fluctuation. Further, the control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure of the third embodiment adopts the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Below, a change part is demonstrated based on the process of above-mentioned 3rd Embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation start process (FIGS. 208A and 208B), which will be described later, and the first variation pattern setting process of the first embodiment (figures) for each process in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) 128), below-mentioned first variation processing (FIG. 210), first big-hit game start processing (FIG. 130) of the first embodiment (FIG. 130), below-mentioned first big hit game processing (FIG. 211), below-mentioned first interlocking setting processing (FIG. 213) is executed. Similarly, for each process in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134), the second change start process (FIGS. 214A and 214B) described later, the second change pattern setting process in the first embodiment (FIG. 136), and The second variation process (Figure 216) of the second big hit game start process of the first embodiment (Figure 138), the second big hit game process described later (Figure 217), the second small hit game start of the first embodiment The process (FIG. 140), the second small hit game process (FIG. 198) of the third embodiment (FIG. 198), and the second interlock setting process (FIG. 218) described later are executed.

[First change start process]
FIGS. 208A and 208B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the fourth embodiment. The same processing as in the first variation start processing (FIGS. 193A and 193B) in the third embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the first priority determination process between the hit determination process of step S307a and the setting process of the determination result information of step S308a (step S341a). In the first priority determination process, a process of determining the variation of the special symbol to be prioritized from the determination result in the hit determination process of step S307a and the gaming situation on the second special symbol side is performed. Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment (FIG. 193A), the setting of the forced off flag of the second special symbol is performed from the result of the hit determination in the processing of step S313a and step S314a, but in the present embodiment the first priority determination processing ( It carries out in step S341 a). Therefore, after the process of step S308a, the process proceeds to the process after step S331a.

  Further, after the process of step S335a, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of resetting the count value of the short time limit to 0 (step S342a). The present embodiment is provided with the time saving limit function, and the time saving limit counter is counted up in the time saving function setting process (step S762a) executed at the end of the big hit game. The process of step S342a is performed when stopping the operation of the time saving function by the digestion of the ST number of times.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 209 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first priority determination process according to the fourth embodiment. The same processing as that of the first priority determination processing (FIG. 168) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numeral, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the determination result of the above-described first special symbol hit determination processing (step S307a) is a big hit (step S371a). Then, if the determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit (YES in step S371a), the forcible removal flag of the second special symbol is set to ON (step S372a), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (NO in step S371a), the main control MPU 4100a executes processing (step S361a to step S367a) common to the second embodiment described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first variation start process described above (FIGS. 208A and 208B), when the first special symbol is not a lottery period in which there is no misalignment in the lottery, (NO in the processing of step S311 , And the first priority determination process is performed. Then, in the first priority determination process (FIG. 209), when the variation of the first special symbol is a big hit, a non-lottery period in which the second special symbol is deviated by no lottery is set and a big hit does not occur. In the case where the second special symbol is in the process of change, a process is performed which gives priority to the change that is advantageous to the player.

[Process during first change]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first during-variation process in the fourth embodiment. The first variable processing in the present embodiment is based on the first variable processing (FIG. 194) in the third embodiment as the step in the first variable processing (FIG. 169) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The process of S552a is added. Since this process is a combination of the process common to the above-mentioned first variable in-process, the same symbol is attached and the description is omitted.

[First jackpot game processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first jackpot gaming process according to the fourth embodiment. The processing common to the first jackpot game processing (FIG. 158) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numerals and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 turns on a probability change flag indicating that the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is a high probability state (probability state) as each processing for ending the jackpot game. The state is set, and the number of times (ST number of times) of the special symbol lottery to be in the high probability state is set 165 times (step S761a). Next, the time-shortening function setting process (FIG. 132) is performed in which the control related to the time-shortening limit function is added (step S762a). These processes are configurations unique to this embodiment. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Time saving function setting process]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving function setting process in the fourth embodiment. The same processing as that of the time saving function setting process (FIG. 132) in the first embodiment is given the same reference numeral, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the big hit (first big hit A) which activates the time saving function at this time (YES at step S751) and the current (big hit determination) game mode is not the rush mode In this case (NO in step S752), the time saving function is activated to change the gaming state to the time saving state, so that the count value of the time saving limit is incremented by 1 and updated (step S761). Then, it is determined whether the count value of the time limit has reached 3 (the number of times of the time limit) (step S762). When the counter value has not reached 3 (NO in step S762), the time saving flag is turned on to activate the time saving function (step S753). Thereafter, the process ends.

  Thereby, the counter value of the time saving limit increases each time the first big hit A1 occurs continuously in the short state (lash preparation mode) when the time saving function is operated. That is, the process of step S761 described above is the number counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the first big hit A1. Then, when the counter value reaches 3 (time reduction limit number of times) (YES in step S762), main control MPU 4100a triggers time reduction with the time reduction limit number of times even if the current big hit is the first big hit A1. By not activating the function, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the high probability non-short state (lash mode).

  When the main control MPU 4100a does not operate the time saving function triggered by the current big hit (NO in step S751, YES in step S752, YES in step S762), the time limit counter value is reset to 0. Then (step S763), the process ends. Thus, when a big hit (a big hit other than the first big hit A1, for example, the first big hit X in modification 2 described later) that does not operate the short function occurs, the count value of the short limit is 0 when counting up to now Reset to (initialization of the counting means). The process of step S763 (transition inhibiting means) executed after the determination of NO in step S751 in the rush preparation mode will inhibit the transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, and the type of jackpot generated is also important The interest of the game is enhanced.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocked setting process in the fourth embodiment. The first interlocking setting process of this embodiment is based on the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 195) of the third embodiment, and steps S1111a and S1111a of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 170) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The process of S1112a is added. Since this process is a combination of the process common to the first interlocked setting process described above, the same reference numeral is attached and the description is omitted.

[Second variation start process]
FIG. 214A and FIG. 214B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the second variation start process in the fourth embodiment. The same processing as the second variation start processing (FIGS. 196A and 196B) in the third embodiment is assigned the same reference numeral and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the second priority determination process between the hit determination process of step S307 b and the setting process of the determination result information of step S308 b (step S341 b). In the second priority determination process, a process of determining the variation of the special symbol to be prioritized from the determination result in the hit determination process of step S307 b and the gaming situation on the first special symbol side is performed. Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment (FIG. 196A), although the setting of the forced off flag of the first special symbol is performed from the result of the hit determination in the processing of step S313 b and step S314 b, the second priority determination processing ( It carries out in step S341 b). Therefore, after the process of step S308b, the process proceeds to the process after step S331b.

  In addition, after the processing of step S335b, the main control MPU 4100a executes processing of resetting the counter value of the time limit to 0 (step S342b). The present embodiment is provided with a time saving limit function, and the time saving limit counter is counted up in the time saving function setting process (step S762b) executed at the end of the big hit game. The process of step S 342 b is performed when stopping the operation of the time saving function by digesting the ST number of times.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second priority determination process according to the fourth embodiment. The processes common to the second priority determination process (FIG. 172) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the determination result of the above-described second special symbol hit determination process (step S307 b) is a big hit (step S371 b). Then, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit (YES in step S371b), the forced removal flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (step S372b), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (NO in step S371b), the main control MPU 4100a executes the same processing (step S361b to step S367b) as the second embodiment described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the second special symbol in the above-described second change start process (FIGS. 214A and 214B) is not a lottery period in which the second special symbol is not shifted by no lottery (NO in the process of step S311 b And the second priority determination process is performed. Then, in the second priority determination process (FIG. 215), when the variation of the second special symbol is a big hit, a non-lottery period in which the first special symbol is deviated by no lottery is set, and it is not a big hit. In the case where the first special symbol is fluctuating, processing is performed to prioritize the fluctuation that is advantageous to the player.

[Process during second change]
FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second variable processing in the fourth embodiment. The second in-varying process of the present embodiment is based on the second in-varying process (FIG. 197) in the third embodiment and is based on the second in-varying process (FIG. 173) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The processing of S 552 b is added. Since this process is a combination of the process common to the above-mentioned second variable process, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second jackpot game process according to the fourth embodiment. Note that the processing common to the second jackpot game processing (FIG. 161) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 turns on a probability change flag indicating that the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is a high probability state (probability state) as each processing for ending the jackpot game. The state is set, and the number of times (ST number of times) of the special symbol lottery to be in the high probability state is set 165 times (step S761 b). Next, the time-shortening function setting process (FIG. 132) is performed in which the control related to the time-shortening limit function is added (step S762b). These processes are configurations unique to this embodiment. The details of the time saving function setting process are as described in FIG.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 218 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a second interlocking setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The second interlocking setting process of the present embodiment is based on the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 199) of the third embodiment and based on the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 174) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The process of S1112b is added. Since this process is a combination of the process common to the above-mentioned second interlocked setting process, the same reference numeral is attached and the description is omitted.

<Effect control>
[Round effect setting process]
Subsequently, effect control in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. In the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an effect according to the player's preference in the big hit game. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the round effect setting process in the fourth embodiment. The round effect setting process is one of the effect control process (step S3102) and the sound control process (step S3103) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. Moreover, FIG. 220 is a figure which shows an example of the presentation transition in a big hit game.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether a big hit start command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3601). The big hit start command is the number of rounds according to the type of big hit in the above-mentioned first big hit game processing (step S704a of FIG. 211) or the second big hit game processing (step S704 b of FIG. 217). It is set to include information such as the number of winnings. Then, if the big hit start command has not been received (NO in step S3601), the process proceeds to step S3604 described later. In the present process, first, the game effect (initial effect) of the first round is set in the process of steps S3601 to S3603.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a big hit start command (YES in step S3601), it sets an initial effect of the big hit game based on the game information (number of consecutive big hit, last selected song, etc.) (Step S3602). The big hit game consists of a plurality of round games corresponding to the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2103. In the present embodiment, the initial effect is an effect in the first round of the round game (display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a song output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc.).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a selection operation reception period in which the player can select an effect by operating the operation means (step S3603), and ends the present process. Here, the selection operation acceptance period is set in the first round of round game (initial effect), and at this time, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a line prompting the player to perform the selection operation. It will be. Specifically, it is informed that it is possible for the player to select a song (song A or B) to be played in the round game after the second round by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405. In the round game of the first round, the song A flows, and a display (sea of the night) in which the song A is imaged is displayed on the screen.

  Next, if the periphery control MPU 4140a does not receive the big hit start command (NO in step S3601), it determines whether or not it is the selection operation reception period set in the process of step S3603 described above (NO Step S3604). Then, if it is not in the selection operation acceptance period (NO in step S3604), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is in the selection operation acceptance period (YES in step S3604), setting of game effects (follow effect) in the second round and subsequent steps is performed in the processing in step S3605 and subsequent steps.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a valid operation input during the selection operation acceptance period (step S3605). Here, the operation input of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 detected during the selection operation reception period in which the player can select a song in the first round of round game is regarded as a valid operation input.

  When there is a valid operation input (YES in step S3605), peripheral control MPU 4140a selects an effect based on the operation input (step S3606), and whether or not the selected effect is the same as the initial effect It is determined (step S3607). Specifically, the song played in the first round of the round game (song A) and the song (song A or song B) selected by the player as the song played in the round game after the second round are the same. Determine if there is.

  If the selected effect and the initial effect are the same (YES in step S3607), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets continuation of the initial effect as a subsequent effect for the second and subsequent rounds (step S3608). Thereafter, the process ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220 (B1), the song (song A) and the display pattern (sea of the night) flowing in the first round of the round game continue the second round of the round game. By sending the continuation of the song from the position where the time (predetermined time) required for the initial effect has passed to the second round without returning the song to the beginning, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the user feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, if the selected effect and the initial effect are not the same (NO in step S3607), peripheral control MPU 4140a performs setting to start the effect selected as the effect of the second round and onward from the beginning (step S3609). Thereafter, the process ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220 (B2), in the round game of the second round, a song (song B) is newly played from the beginning of the song, and a screen is displayed on the display (sunny sky) in which the song B is imaged. The display is switched.

  If there is no valid operation input (NO in step S3605), the peripheral control MPU 4140a tunes the song being played in the first round game (initial effect) as a subsequent effect in the second and subsequent rounds. The setting of repeating the initial effect is performed (step S3610), and the process ends. In addition, you may perform the setting which complete | finishes the production of a song by initial stage production as a subsequent production. Further, as the process of step S3610, the initial effect in the first round game may be continued as it is, similarly to the process of step S3608.

  As described above, in the round game, by making it possible to execute the effect reflecting the preference of the player, it is possible to turn to the effect effect which is only directed to the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 2103, It can enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the initial effect in the round game is set based on the previous game information, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, when the player selects the same effect as the effect at the time of the initial effect, the effect is continuously executed even after the second round. If the player has selected the same effect as the initial effect because it matches the preference, the effect is temporarily stopped at the end of one round, and repeated again from the beginning of the effect at the start of two rounds, the player may feel discomfort There is a possibility that the player may be offended by giving Here, it is possible to suppress the discomfort and the disturbance of the rhythm by continuing the effect which has been executed in the first round as it is.

(Effect of the fourth embodiment)
According to the fourth embodiment, in the low probability short time state (normal mode) and the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode), the high probability time short state (lash Transition to the preparation mode) and transition to the high probability non-time short state (lash mode, specific mode) which is more advantageous for the player than the rush preparation mode triggered by the first jackpot which is given the definite change function but not the short time function. In gaming machines that can do this, multiple occurrences of the first jackpot (time limit reached) to which the probability changing function and the time saving function are given are also used as the transition triggers to the rush mode. Such an occurrence of the first jackpot can increase the expectation value to shift to the rush mode, thereby reducing discouragement of the player due to not winning the first jackpot to shift directly to the rush mode in one occurrence. can do. In addition, since the means for transition to the rush mode is increased, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Here, when the rush preparation mode in which the time saving function is activated is entered from the normal mode, the time saving limit is activated. In the short time limit activated state, the first big hit A (A1 or A2) that triggered the entry into the rush preparation mode is counted once and the first big hit A1 generated in the rush preparation mode is added and counted. Then, when the counter value reaches the predetermined short time limit number (3), the rush mode is entered. At this time, the rush mode rush probability at the time of the big hit differs according to the number of occurrences (counter value) of the first big hit to which the probability changing function and the time saving function are given. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206C, the first time is 50% since the normal mode and 75% because the second time is in the rush preparation mode, and the third time is 100% rush mode entry probability with reaching the time limit number of times. Become. Furthermore, if the number of occurrences of the first big hit to which the probability changing function and the time saving function are added is increased, the number of time limit is approached, so the rush mode entry expected value increases with the rush mode entry probability at each occurrence of the big hit. As described above, since the probability of entering the rush mode and the expected value of rushing become higher as the number of occurrences of the first jackpot given the probability changing function and the time saving function increases, the player's willingness to continue playing the game and the interest of the game are enhanced. be able to.

  In addition, once rush mode is entered, any big hit will be continued in rush mode (with a probability change function and no time saving function), and the rush mode will be repeated until the number of STs is settled (until predetermined conditions are satisfied). As in the rush preparation mode, the mode does not end upon reaching the time limit number. As a result, if rush mode is entered, a certain gaming value (a prize ball winning opportunity) can be provided, and the value (advantage) of rush mode can be further enhanced. Thus, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the round game, an initial effect based on the game information up to that point is executed in the first R, and an effect reflecting the preference of the player can be performed in the second R and thereafter. It can also be directed to an effect that is directed only to the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 2103, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Furthermore, when the player selects the same effect as the initial effect, the initial effect is continued even after the second round, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort or a disturbance in the rhythm due to the switching of the effect. Can.

(Modification 1)
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the probability of entering the rush mode increases as the number of occurrences of the first big hit (time hit) to which the probability changing function and the time saving function are added is increased in the short time limit activated state. On the other hand, in the first modification, it is set that the probability of entering into the rush mode is overwhelmingly higher in the first time occurrence of the time-long-time big hit than the second time. Hereinafter, the first modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram for describing characteristic game specifications of the first modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 221 (A) is a table showing the transition of the mode distribution ratio in the short time limit activated state of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 221 (B) shows the mode distribution ratio in the time short limit activated state in the modification 1. FIG. 221 (C) is a table showing a transition, and FIG. 221 (C) is an example of a table showing the winning probability of the regular symbol of the first modification.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (A), in the fourth embodiment described above, the rush mode rush probability at the time of the big hit becomes high according to the increase in the number of occurrences (counter value) of the time / day hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), in the first modification, while the rush mode entry probability is 50% when the first time minor hit occurs (from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode entry), The rush mode entry probability at the time of the second time jackpot is 1%. Thus, the distribution ratio of the first jackpot B in the normal mode (jacket with a probability change function but not with a short function is not 50%) is set to 50%, and the first jackpot B and the first jackpot in the rush preparation mode By setting the distribution ratio of A2 (time saving no big hit) to 1%, it is considered as a game that places emphasis on winning the first big hit B at the first time in the normal mode. If the first jackpot in the normal mode is not the first jackpot B, it is almost impossible to expect the occurrence of a jackpot in the rush preparation mode, and the rush mode rush can only be aimed at reaching the bullet limit. In the first modification, since the time-limit limit number is set to 3, the rush preparation mode is entered from the lash preparation mode with a probability of 100% when the third time-minute big hit occurs.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (C), in the case of the normal symbol lottery in the first modification, both probabilities are set so that the player can not distinguish between the non-time-short state and the time-short state. Specifically, in the case of a non-time-short state where the time-saving function is not provided, a win is made at a probability of 1/200 per common drawing. In addition, when the time saving function is given, if it is in the time saving state, it will be elected per common drawing with a probability of 1/199. In this manner, the short time state is a state in which the short time state can not be distinguished from the non-short time state (minute time short state).

(Effect of Modified Example 1)
According to the first modification of the fourth embodiment, if the first big hit in the normal mode is not the first big hit B, the first big hit B and the first big hit A2 (time saving no big hit) occurrence in the rush preparation mode can not be expected substantially Since the rush mode rush can only be aimed at reaching the time limit, it is possible to provide a game having a strong and weak possibility of rush mode rush. Thus, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, by setting the time reduction state of the first modification to a minute time reduction state in which the time reduction state is indistinguishable from the non-time reduction state, the ball adjustment can be facilitated. Also, by making it impossible for the player to distinguish whether or not the big hit in the short time state (lash preparation mode) when the short time limit function is activated, the player is not conscious of the short time limit number too much. By providing a minute state so that interest does not concentrate on how many times the time limit is to be achieved, it is possible for the player to play the whole game including the above-mentioned round effect etc. in the time reduction state (rush preparation mode). It can bring attention.

(Modification 2)
In the fourth embodiment described above, the probability changing function of the ST number (165 times) is added to all the jackpots, and transition to the normal mode is triggered by the digestion of the ST number. On the other hand, in the second modification, there is a normal big hit (first big hit X) to which the probability changing function or the time saving function is not given, and the transition to the normal mode triggered by the winning of the normal big hit is set. Modification 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram for describing characteristic game specifications of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), when the jackpot of the symbol X is won in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the probability changing function and the time saving function are selected when the player wins the jackpot (first big hit X, second big hit X). It will be a "normal time saving nothing" jackpot that is not granted. From the fourth embodiment, the distribution ratio of the big hit type is changed. The big hit distribution ratios of symbol A1, symbol A2, symbol B and symbol X in the first special symbol lottery are 20%, 44%, 18% and 18% in this order. The big hit distribution ratios of symbol A, symbol B and symbol X in the second special symbol lottery are 62%, 20% and 18% in order. Also here the big hit of the symbol A2 in the first special symbol lottery is different addition / non-grant of time saving function according to the probability state, when the probability state is normal state (normal mode) time saving function is given, probability state Is a high probability state (lash preparation mode, rush mode), the time saving function is not provided.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), the rush mode entry probability is 18% when the first time hit (first big hit A1 or A2) occurs (from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode). The rush mode entry probability at the time of occurrence of the second time-time big / big hit (first big hit A1) is 62%. Here, in the second modification, since there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode at all times with a probability of 18%, the rush mode entry probability at the time of occurrence of the third time-short-large hit (first big hit A1) of reaching the time-shortening limit number is 82%.

  Subsequently, FIG. 223 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state (game mode) of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. Here, points different from the fourth embodiment (FIG. 205) will be described. The second modification is characterized in that the first / second big hit X to which the probability variation function and the time saving function are not provided is provided, and when these functions are given, it is effective until the next big hit. Therefore, even if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode, the first jackpot X is obtained with a probability of 18%, and there are cases where mode transition does not occur. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, transition from the rush preparation mode and the rush mode to the normal mode is triggered by the number of STs being taken, but in the second modification, the occurrence of the first / second big hit X usually triggers Transition to mode

(Effect of modification 2)
According to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the first / second big hit X (without normal time reduction) occurs in the rush mode or the rush preparation mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Also, the first / second big hit X big hit distribution ratio is uniformly 18% in any game mode. Therefore, even if the rush mode or rush preparation mode is entered, there is always the possibility of shifting to the normal mode, so it is possible to give a sensation of whether or not the mode is maintained against the fluctuation immediately after entering the mode. By thus increasing the chance of transition to the game mode, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Also, even if the first big hit A1 that occurs during the rush preparation mode is added and counted, if the first big hit X occurs before reaching the time limit number of times, the count that has been counted up to now will be reset. , Opportunity to shift to rush mode. As described above, since the big hit in the time limit activation state is also important whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and various game patterns are generated, it is possible to enhance the fun of the rush preparation mode.

Fifth Embodiment
The gaming machine of the present invention is a game which is more advantageous for the player than the gaming state (high probability time reduction state, rush preparation mode) in which the time reduction function is operated by not activating the time reduction function generally regarded as advantageous to the player. It is characterized by providing a state (high probability non-time short state, rush mode). In the embodiments described above, when the time saving function (time reduction number) is given in the big hit of the special symbol lottery, the probability changing function of the same number (ST number of times) as the time reduction number is added. And, in the first to third embodiments, the transition opportunity to the high probability non-short time state (lash mode) is only the occurrence of the first big hit B (without probability variation and no time saving) in the first to third embodiments, but in the fourth embodiment Also includes multiple occurrences (time limit reached) of the first big hit A (with probability variation and time reduction) in high probability time reduction state. By thus increasing the opportunity for transition to a gaming state (high probability non-short state) advantageous to the player, the interest of the game is enhanced. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 231, game control and effect control capable of further enhancing the interest of the game regarding the transition to the high probability non-short state will be described.

[Game board configuration]
First, in the gaming board of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned gaming board, the ordinary electric role is provided in the winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, and the low probability non-short time state (normal mode) and the high probability time short In the state (lash preparation mode), the game on the first special symbol side is at the center, and in the high probability non-time-short state (lash mode), the player's driving operation or the player is centered on the game on the second special symbol side. It is sufficient if the configuration is such that it is possible to guide a winning winning opening. In addition, the second starting opening and the special winning opening are disposed in the same driving operation direction.

[Specs per hit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 226, the hit specifications of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 224 is a table showing winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 225 is a table showing the hit types and distribution ratios of the first special symbols of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 226 is a table showing the hit types and distribution ratios of the second special symbols of the fifth embodiment.

  FIG. 224 (A) is an example of a hit determination table of the first special symbol lottery. In the first special symbol lottery, when the winning probability is a low probability state (normal state), the jackpot is won with a probability of 5/399. Also, in the case of a high probability state (probability state) in which the hit winning probability is set higher than the normal state, a jackpot is won with a probability of 7/399. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided even in the first special symbol lottery, and a small hit is won with a probability of 5/399.

  FIG. 224 (B) is an example of a hit determination table of the second special symbol lottery. In the second special symbol lottery, as in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of 5/399 and 7/399, respectively, when the winning probability is in the low probability state (normal state) or the high probability state (probability state) To win a big hit. In addition, it wins a small hit with a probability of 390/399.

  FIG. 224 (C) is an example of a table showing the winning probability of a normal symbol. In the normal symbol lottery, in the case of a non-time-short state where the time-saving function is not provided, the player wins per common map with a probability of 1/200. In addition, when the time saving function is given, if it is in the time saving state, it will be elected per common drawing with a probability of 1/199. In the present embodiment, both probabilities are set so that the player can not distinguish between the non-time saving state and the time saving state.

  As shown in FIGS. 225 (A) to (C), the first special symbol is composed of eight types of jackpots and one kind of jackpots, and each jackpot is targeted to be provided with a time-saving function according to the gaming state. The number of changes (time reductions) is different. In addition, all the big hit give a probability change function of ST number of times 128 times.

  An opening pattern A and an opening pattern B are provided on the big hit of the first special symbol as the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103. 6 types of big hit of design AE become opening pattern A. As for the big hit of the symbols A to E, the number of times of time saving is set for each. As shown in FIG. 225 (A), when the gaming state is a low probability non-short state, the jackpot (first jackpot A) of the symbol A is given 128 time-shortening times equal to the ST times. That is, the first big hit A that occurs in the low probability non-time-short state can provide the high probability time-short state with the fluctuation upper limit of 128 times. In addition, the big hit (the first big hit B to E) of the symbols B to E is given a number of time reductions of 118 times, 64 times, 32 times and 32 times smaller than the ST times, respectively. That is, the first big hits B to E occurring in the low probability non-short state can provide the high probability time short state for the number of time reductions and the high probability non-time short states for the number of STs minus the number of time reductions. Moreover, the big hit (1st big hit F) of the pattern F used as the open pattern B does not provide a time saving function (it is 0 times of time reduction). The first big hit F is not affected by the playing state at the time of occurrence. That is, the first big hit F can provide a high probability non-short state for the ST number no matter which game state occurs. The probability (allocation ratio) of winning the first big hit A to F in the first special symbol lottery is set to 5%, 20%, 35%, 25%, 10%, 5%, respectively.

  The small hit of the first special symbol is one type in any gaming state, and it becomes the small hit (first small hit G) of the symbol G with a distribution ratio of 100%. In addition, since the small hit is a hit without state transition, the probability changing function and the time saving function do not operate. Also, the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is the opening pattern A.

  In this embodiment, the open pattern of the first small hit G is set to the same open pattern A as the first large hit A to E, and the common drawing win probability is set so that the short time state and the non short time upper body are not distinguished. Thus, the player is prevented from realizing whether or not the gaming state has shifted to the state when the hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (B), when the gaming state is high probability time short state, the number of time reductions given by the first big hit A to C is given when the gaming state is low probability non-short time state It differs from the number of time savings. Specifically, the first jackpots A to C give 0, 16, and 32 time-shortening times, respectively. That is, the first jackpot A generated in the high probability time-short state provides the high probability non-time short state for the ST number of times. Also, the first big hit B and C occurring in the high probability time reduction state is shifted to the high probability time reduction state through the high probability time reduction state for a short number of times less than when the gaming state occurs in the low probability time reduction state It is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (C), when the gaming state is the high probability non-short state, the number of time-savings provided by the first big hit A to E is set to zero. That is, the first big hits A to F generated in the high probability non-short state all newly provide the high probability non-short state for the ST number of times without shifting the gaming state to the state.

  As shown in FIGS. 226 (A) to 226 (C), the second special symbol is composed of two types of big hit and one type of small hit. Here, the small hit of the second special symbol is the same pattern and open pattern as the small hit G of the first special symbol. In addition, all jackpots are provided with 128 times of probability variation function of ST times.

  In the big hit of the second special symbol, a big hit (second big hit A) of the symbol A of the open pattern B and a big hit (second big hit B) of the symbol B of the open pattern C are provided. The second big hit A and B both give a probability function of ST times 128 times. Then, as shown in FIGS. 226 (A) and (B), when the gaming state is the low probability non-short state and the high probability time short state, the second big hit A and B is 128 times the same as the ST number. It is possible to provide time-shortening times, that is, to provide a high probability short-term state with a fluctuation upper limit of 128 times. Also, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), when the gaming state is high probability time short state, the second big hit A and B do not provide the time short function. That is, the second jackpots A and B generated in the high probability non-short state both newly provide the high probability non-short state for the ST number of times without shifting the gaming state. The probability (allocation ratio) of winning the second big hit A in the second special symbol lottery is 40%, and the probability of winning the second big hit B is 60%.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation time of the second special symbol in the low probability non-short state and high probability time short state is set to a long time (600 seconds or more), the second special symbol in these gaming states The probability of hitting a special symbol lottery is quite low. Even if a hit occurs, since the time reduction number equal to the ST number is given, there is no transition to the high probability non-short state (lash mode) most advantageous for the player.

  Here, three types of open patterns A to C are provided in the open mode of the special winning opening 2103 of the present embodiment. The opening pattern A applied not only to the first big hit A to E but also to the first small hit G and the second small hit G opening mode is the open pattern E of the second small hit C of the first embodiment described above This is the same as FIG. 146 (D). The opening pattern A has a short opening time and is provided to be capable of winning a prize ball by accidental winning. Specifically, when about 1 to 2 balls of game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103, about 15 to 30 balls of winning balls can be obtained. On the other hand, the opening pattern B of the first big hit F and the second big hit A and the open pattern C of the second big hit B have a long opening time of the big winning opening 2103 and the player can obtain a sufficient winning ball. Is set as Specifically, the open pattern B can obtain about 500 award balls, and the open pattern C is an open mode that can obtain about 2000 award balls.

[Transition of production mode]
FIG. 227 is a diagram for describing effect mode transition in the fifth embodiment.

  In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, the high probability non-short state (lash mode) is the most advantageous game state for the player. Then, as a trigger for transition to the rush mode, the achievement of a predetermined number of changes (time reduction) is set in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode). In the rush preparation mode, since the transition of the gaming state is possible without going through the big hit, an effect mode corresponding to the number of times of ST is set for each big hit serving as a transition trigger to the rush preparation mode. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 227 (A) and (B), the corresponding effect mode transition will be described by taking, as an example, a hit of the first special symbol that can be generated in the low probability non-short state (normal mode).

  FIG. 227A is a presentation mode setting table for the first touch in the normal mode. In the effect mode setting table, the effect mode is set for each contact (FIG. 225 (A)) according to the number of fluctuations in the gaming state after the occurrence of the contact.

  Specifically, the first jackpots B to E generated in the normal mode can be shifted from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, triggered by time-limited number of times. Therefore, in the gaming state (a rush preparation mode) after these big hit games, a prophecy effect mode is set which indicates the possibility of shift to the rush mode. The precursor effect mode is executed with fluctuations while the time saving function is activated, so the period varies depending on the type of big hit. In addition, the number of time-saving times in which the prognostic effect mode is applied is up to 64 times. Further, in the precursor effect mode, the time-release canceling effect is performed whether or not the time-saving function is released at the timing when the time-saving number (16, 32, 64) given to any of the big hits is reached.

  Here, if the time saving function continues to operate even if the precursor effect mode ends as in the first big hit B, the revenge effect mode is set until the time saving number is consumed. The revenge effect mode is set to a game in the rush preparation mode with 65 or more fluctuation times, and is an effect mode that suggests that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the low probability short time state (normal mode).

  In the first big hit B, the remaining 10 times of the ST number become the high probability non-short state. Therefore, in the high probability non-short time state (rush mode) for the remaining 10 times fluctuation, chance presentation mode that suggests that the rush mode can be continued regardless of any big hit if it is possible to win the big hit during this time It is set. Also, at this time, the player "rights strikes" to aim for winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2012. In the second special symbol lottery, it won a small hit with a high probability (390/399) without winning a big hit, so during this time, a short-term bonus (ST 10 times) in which you can get a prize ball by the second small hit G A chance presentation mode may indicate that a period has been granted.

  In each of the first big hit C to E, since the number of times of time reduction is set to 64 or less, only the precursor effect mode is set. Then, when the time saving end occurs without a new big hit occurring in the prog- er effect mode, the battle reach victory effect is executed in the first change of the subsequent rush mode. The details of the battle reach victory effect will be described later.

  Since the first big hit A is the same number of time reductions as the ST number (128), transition from the rush preparation mode to the normal mode is triggered by the time reduction. Therefore, in the rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit A, there is no shift to the rush mode triggered by the time-limited number of digestions, but there is anticipation effect mode (from 1 time to 64 times fluctuation) to expect that possibility. It is set. Here, it is assumed that the Gasse omen effect mode is the same effect mode as the omen effect mode. Then, after the end of the Gasse admonition effect mode, a revenge effect mode (from 65 times to 128 times fluctuation) is set.

  The first small hit G does not trigger a transition to the gaming state, but as described above, the opening patterns of the first big hits A to E and the large winning opening 2103 are the same, and the time saving function is provided in this embodiment Since it is difficult for the player to grasp the change in probability), it is difficult for the player to judge whether he has won the small hit or the big hit. Therefore, in the normal mode after the occurrence of the first small hit G, the gassed precursory effect mode is set. As a result, the player can not distinguish between the big hit and the small hit from the effect mode, and can expect the game after the small hit to increase the interest of the game.

  Further, since the first big hit F shifts directly to the rush mode without the operation of the time saving function, the above-mentioned prognostic presentation mode, revenge presentation mode and chance presentation mode are not set.

  Here, the first performance mode setting table in the normal mode has been described, but the same applies to the first performance mode in the rush preparation mode. As described above with reference to FIG. 225 (B), since the first jackpot in the rush preparation mode is given up to 32 times of time reduction at maximum, only the setting of the precursor effect mode is performed. In addition, the first small hit G is set to a 32 times fluctuation Gasse precursor effect mode. Moreover, since any big hit which generate | occur | produces in rush mode will also be rush mode (high probability non-short time state), there is no setting of these production modes.

  In FIG. 227 (B), when (B1) the first big hit B occurs in the normal mode, (B2) when the first big hit A occurs, (B3) the first during the rush mode after the first big hit D occurs. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an example of effect mode transition when a big hit B occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (B1), the rendering mode when the first big hit B occurs in the low probability non-short state (normal mode) is a precursor effect mode (1 to 64 in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) Transition to the chance presentation mode (119 to 128 times fluctuation) in the high probability non-time-short state (rush mode) which is shifted by revenge effect mode (65 to 118 times fluctuation) and time reduced number of times. In addition, as shown in FIG. 227 (B2), the rendering mode when the first big hit A occurs in the low probability non-short state (normal mode) is the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) in the garbled admonition mode ( It transitions to the revenge presentation mode (65 to 128 times) from 1 to 64 times fluctuation).

  As described above, the first jackpot A that does not include the transition trigger to the rush mode and the first jackpot B including the transition trigger to the rush mode to the player by executing the caste accompaniment effect mode and the revenge presentation mode also in the first jackpot A. Without making a distinction, it is possible to have the expectation of rush mode transition just before the ST number of digestions (10 remainings). Thus, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (B3), the rendering mode when the first big hit D occurs in the low probability non-short state (normal mode) is the precursor effect mode (1-32) in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) Run). If the first big hit B occurs at the 20th fluctuation number in this precursor effect mode, the first big hit B in the rush preparation mode applies the ST number 128 times and the hour reduction number 16 times, so the time is reduced 16 times from this point Fluctuation begins and along with it, the prognostic mode also extends. The transition timing from rush preparation mode rush to rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit D is delayed, but the number of fluctuations in the rush mode after the transition is due to the occurrence of the first big hit B, which has a smaller number of time reductions than the ST number. Will increase from 96 times to 112 times. Therefore, since the player can have a hope that the rush mode period which can be acquired even if the jackpot mode is extended due to the occurrence of a big hit during the rush preparation mode, the interest of the game is not reduced. A value smaller than the number of time reductions corresponding to the big hit that has triggered the present precursor effect mode rush may be set as the number of time reductions corresponding to the newly generated big hit. In addition, if a big hit occurs during the prognostic effect mode, the prognostic effect mode period (the number of times (shortened number of times (predetermined number of times) finally given by the rush mode entry) may fluctuate, so the interest of the game increases. .

[Transition of gaming state]
FIG. 228 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the fifth embodiment. Here, it will be described together with the transition of the above-mentioned effect mode.

  In the low probability non-short time state (normal mode) which is the gaming state at the start of the game, the game of the first special symbol is mainly. Here, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the gaming state shifts according to the type of hit. When the winning result is one of the first big hit A to E, the gaming state shifts from the low probability non-short state (normal mode) to the high probability short state (lash preparation mode). When the winning result is the first big hit F, the gaming state shifts from the low probability non-short state (normal mode) to the high probability non-short state (lash mode). In addition, if the winning result is the first small hit G, the false leading effect effect mode is set up to 64 times of fluctuation.

  In the rush preparation mode, the game of the first special symbol is mainly performed as in the normal mode. The rush preparation mode triggered by the first jackpot A returns to the normal mode when 128 times of time reduction (ST number) are digested in the high probability time reduction state in the Gasse admonition effect mode and the revenge effect mode. In addition, the rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit B shifts to the rush mode when the time reduction number 118 is digested in the high probability time reduction state in the precursor effect mode and the revenge effect mode. The rush mode triggered by the time-saving end of the first big hit B returns to the normal mode when the remaining ST times of 10 times are digested in the high probability non-time short state in the chance effect mode. In addition, the rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit C to E shifts to the rush mode when the time saving number is digested in the high probability time reduction state in the precursor effect mode. In rush mode triggered by the time reduction end of the first big hit C to E, the battle reach victory effect is executed in the first change immediately after the entry, and returns to the normal mode when the remaining ST number is digested.

  When the first jackpot A or F is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode after the jackpot game. When the player wins the first big hit B to E, after the big hit game, the high probability time short state in the precursor effect mode is entered, and if the number of short times is digested, the rush mode is entered. If the player wins the first small hit G, after the small hit game, it executes a 32 times fluctuation gasse precursor effect mode.

  In rush mode, the game of the second special symbol is the main. In the rush mode, the normal mode is entered when the ST number at the time of entry is digested. In the second special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery) in the rush mode, the game mode is not shifted to another game mode no matter which jackpot is won. The rush mode period is extended by adding the number of changes performed in the rush mode to any of the big hit.

  In rush mode, the second small hit G is frequently generated in the second special symbol lottery. It is possible for the player to promote the accidental winning based on the second small hit G by continuously hitting the game ball aiming at the second starting opening, and the number of award balls that can be obtained is in the rush mode. Account for the majority of the number of award winning balls (total winning number). In this embodiment, when the second small hit G (30 balls at the maximum) of ST times (128 times) occurs in the rush mode, the second big hit B with the highest number of winning balls by the big hit (about 2000) Balls) Since the above winning balls (up to 3840 balls) can be expected, a series of games in the rush mode is more advantageous to the player than a single big hit game. Also, since the number of winning balls in the first big hit is about 500, the rush mode is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the rush preparation mode mainly for the game of the first special symbol.

[Process mode setting process]
FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect mode setting processing according to the fifth embodiment. The effect mode setting process is one of the processes executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a of the peripheral control board 4010. Although the effect mode may be set from the big hit type and the game mode using the effect mode setting table as shown in FIG. 227 (A) described above, here, an example of processing by flow control will be described.

  The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether a big hit start command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3701). The big hit start command is a command that is set in the big hit game processing when the big hit game is started, and is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010.

  If the peripheral control MPU 414a receives the big hit start command (YES in step S3701), it determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit for providing a time saving function (step S3702). Then, in the case of a big hit (for example, the first big hit F) to which the time saving function is not given (NO in step S3702), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is a big hit for giving the time saving function (YES in step S3702), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether the time saving number is smaller than the ST number (step S3703). If the time saving number is smaller than ST number (YES in step S3703), it is determined whether the time saving number is equal to or less than a predetermined number (step S3704). Here, the predetermined number varies depending on the game mode. In the normal mode, it is "64", and in the rush preparation mode, it is "32".

  Then, if the time reduction number is less than or equal to the predetermined number (YES in step S3704), the peripheral control MPU 414a sets a precursor effect mode until the time reduction number ends (step S3705), and ends this processing. If the time reduction number is not equal to or less than the predetermined number (NO in step S3704), the predetermined number is a precursor effect mode, the predetermined number is exceeded and the time reduction number is the revenge effect mode, and the time reduction number is ST number after the ST number is the chance effect mode The setting is made (step S3706), and the process ends.

  In addition, if the number of time reductions is not less than the number of STs, that is, if the number of time reductions is equal to or more than the number of STs (NO in step S3703), peripheral control MPU 414a generates a predetermined number more than a predetermined number. The number of times is set as the revenge effect mode (step S3707), and the process ends.

  Further, if the big hit start command has not been received (NO in step S3701), the periphery control MPU 414a determines whether a small hit start command has been received (step S3708). When the small hit start command has not been received (NO in step S3708), the present process ends.

  When peripheral control MPU 414a receives the small hit start command (YES in step S3708), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether the time saving function is in operation (step S3709). Since the precursor effect mode is an effect mode that is executed in the time saving state, when the time saving function is not in operation (NO in step S3709), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S3709), a random number setting mode is set up to a predetermined number (step S3710), and the process ends.

  The effect mode switching timing may be determined based on a counter value for counting the number of times of ST.

[Render execution processing]
FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect execution processing in the fifth embodiment. The rendering execution processing is one of the rendering control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control substrate 4010 regarding display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a status transition instruction command for canceling the time saving function has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3801). The state transition instruction command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 when the state of the probability flag or the time saving flag is changed. The state transition instruction command is transmitted when the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set to the on state triggered by a big hit, or when the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set to the off state due to the number of times of ST or time saving.

  When peripheral control MPU 414a receives the state transition instruction command for canceling the time saving function (YES in step S3801), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations in the time saving state has reached the time reduction number (step S3802). Then, if the number of fluctuations in the time saving state has reached the time shortening number (YES in step S3802), it is determined whether or not the present indication effect mode is in progress (step S3803). If the number of fluctuations in the time saving state has not reached the time shortening number (NO in step S3802) or if the precursor effect mode is not in progress even if the time reduction number is reached (NO in step S3803), this processing is performed. finish.

  Then, if the precursory effect mode is in progress (YES in step S3803), the periphery control MPU 414a sets a battle reach flag (step S3804), and the present process ends. Therefore, the battle reach flag is set when the number of time reductions (16, 32, 64) given in the high probability time reduction state in which the present omen effect mode is set is digested.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step S3801: NO), when it has not received the status transition instruction command for canceling the time saving function from main control board 4100 (NO in step S3801). S3805). Then, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (NO in step S3805), this processing ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU 414a receives a change pattern command (YES in step S3805), it determines whether a battle reach flag is set (step S3806). Then, when the battle reach flag is set (YES in step S3806), the fluctuation immediately after the time reduction number assigned without being hit is generated in the admonition effect mode, so the battle reach by the fluctuation The victory effect is executed (step S3807), and the present process ends. If the battle reach flag is not set (NO in step S3806), the normal effect selected according to the effect mode is executed (step S3808), and the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, switching processing of the probability change flag and the short time flag is performed at the start of the change, so when the time reduction end in the precursor effect mode, the time short flag is on when the final change is started in the precursor effect mode Is switched to the off state (time saving function is released). Therefore, at the start of the last change in the precursor effect mode, the peripheral control board 4010 receives a state transition instruction command indicating that the high probability short time state has shifted to the high probability non-time short state. Therefore, when transitioning to the high probability non-short state after passing the number of fluctuations applied without occurrence of hitting in the precursor effect mode, the battle reach is made by the first change in the high probability non-short state after the transition. The player is notified that the rush mode (high probability non-short time state) is entered, which is advantageous for the player, by performing a winning effect.

[Screen transition example]
Subsequently, FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition in the fifth embodiment. FIGS. 231A and 231B show an example of effect transition in the case of transitioning from the high probability time-short state in the prognostic effect mode to the high probability non-time-short state through the number of times of time reduction. FIGS. 231 (A), (C) and (D) show transition examples of transitioning from the high probability time-short state consisting of the prognostic effect mode and the revenge production mode to the high probability non-time-short state through time and time reduction. .

  FIG. 231 (A) shows an example of screen display in the indication effect mode. Here, the rendering element of the high probability time saving state (lash preparation mode) is night (moon and star). In addition, the effect element of the high probability non-time-short state (rush mode) is assumed to be day (sun). In the precursor presentation mode, the transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode is suggested, so the screen display at this time shows the sun behind and behind the clouds in a part of the night sky.

  Further, on the screen display, the remaining fluctuation number is displayed by subtracting the number of times of execution in the mode with the remaining fluctuation number when the precursor effect mode starts being “64”. Here, "50" is displayed. By performing such remaining fluctuation number display, the player who sees the display of “remaining 64 times” at the start of the accompaniment effect mode has a gaming state (high probability non-short state, rush) advantageous to the player after 64 times The game can be played with a sense of expectation for future games, such as whether to shift to mode) or if something good happens during 64 changes. Then, if it is a precursor effect mode triggered by the first big hit D set to 32 times, the first big hit E set to 16 times and the first big hit E set to 16 times, the number of fluctuations to perform the predictive effect mode is 64 times The rush mode will be entered (a battle reach victory effect will be executed) in the middle of the fluctuation digestion of (each of the “49 remaining times” and the “33 remaining times”). As described above, since the rush mode is entered before the remaining fluctuation number displayed on the screen becomes 0, the player's pleasure is great. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further enhanced. Note that, as described above, since the precursor effect mode and the sergeant exemplification effect mode perform the same screen display, the remaining number of fluctuations with the initial value being “64” is also displayed in the sergeant omen effect mode.

  FIG. 231 (B) is a screen display example of battle reach victory effect. Here, the moon, which is an effect element of the rush preparation mode, and the sun, which is an effect element of the rush mode, are in a battle state, and the screen display on which the sun wins is performed. At this time, the player is instructed to "right strike".

  FIG. 231C is a screen display example of the revenge effect mode. Here, although it was not possible to shift to the rush mode during the precursor effect mode, it suggests that the possibility of shifting to the rush mode is higher than that in the normal mode, so as not to let the player give up rush mode aiming. It is assumed that the display occupancy range of the sun and clouds displayed in the precursor effect mode is enlarged.

  FIG. 231 (D) shows a screen display example of the chance effect mode. The chance presentation mode is a presentation mode in the rush mode. However, if a big hit does not occur during this period, it shifts to the normal mode for a short period of time (10 fluctuations), so the entire screen becomes a display of the sun, but the sun shakes and becomes unstable. "" Is displayed on the screen. In addition, when a big hit does not generate | occur | produce during this time and a rush mode is complete | finished, it becomes a screen display which the sun will stop display once and it will disappear with the message of "sorry".

(Effects of the fifth embodiment)
According to the fifth embodiment, the transition trigger to the specific gaming state (high probability non-short state, rush mode) which is advantageous to the player for execution (digestion) of the predetermined number of changes in the high probability time short state (lash preparation mode) In addition to the occurrence of a specific jackpot (first jackpot F), it is possible to increase the opportunity for transition to the rush mode. In addition, the player feels that the player is able to play not only the strength (luck) of winning a big hit but also the ability to stand up (skills) because of the playability that enables entry to the rush mode with a predetermined number of changes. Because it is possible, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Here, in the rush preparation mode, transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode (specific mode) more advantageous to the player is triggered at the end of fluctuation of the predetermined fluctuation number set smaller than the ST number. The predetermined number of times of variation varies depending on the type (the first big hit B to E) of the big hit that triggered the rush preparation mode. If a big hit occurs in the rush preparation mode in which the predetermined number of fluctuations has not been reached, the predetermined number of fluctuations set in accordance with the big hit is reset. Therefore, depending on the type and number of big hits generated in the rush preparation mode. The number of changes required to shift to the rush mode after entering the rush preparation mode changes. As described above, since the end timing of fluctuation of the predetermined number of times of fluctuation serving as a trigger for transition to the rush mode is diversified, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Also, by the big hit that occurs in the rush preparation mode that has not reached the predetermined number of changes, the number of short times (new predetermined number of changes) set according to the big hit is added to the number of short times that have been digested up to that point. If the variable digestion progresses, the rush preparation mode period may become long. However, if the new predetermined number of changes is smaller than the previous predetermined number of changes, the rush mode period that can be acquired will be long, so the player has an expectation for an increase in the rush mode period during the jackpot preparation mode. Can increase the interest of the game.

  In addition, as the predetermined number of changes is smaller than the number of times of ST given to the rush preparation mode, the rush mode period becomes longer. That is, the smaller the number of times of change, the smaller the function of promoting the generation of the rush mode and the larger the function of suppressing the generation of the rush mode. In this way, by adjusting the variable predetermined number of times of fluctuation, it is possible to create a relative gaming situation of promoting and suppressing the occurrence of rush mode generation, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the game mode (the rush preparation mode and the rush mode) before and after the predetermined number of times of change, the rush mode entry ratio changes triggered by the occurrence of a big hit of the same special symbol. Specifically, the first jackpot in the rush preparation mode is a rush mode after the jackpot game at a rate of 10%, but the first jackpot in the rush mode is a rush mode at a rate of 100%. The second big hit in the rush preparation mode is 0% in the rush mode after the big hit and the second big hit in the rush mode is the rush mode at a rate of 100%. As described above, since the rush mode entry ratio is different even if it is the same special symbol lottery at the boundary of the predetermined number of changes, the influence of the digest timing of the change such as reserved memory on the game becomes large. This can enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the rush preparation mode, a precursor effect mode period (a specific effect mode period) is provided in the fluctuation period of the predetermined number of fluctuations. Since the fluctuation period of the predetermined fluctuation number becomes a precursor (preliminary notice) of the rush mode to occur later, it is possible to execute the notice effect which can be conventionally performed only within the range of the upper limit number of holdings for a long time. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained for a long time. In addition, since the precursor effect mode period enters the rush mode if the predetermined number of fluctuations is absorbed, it becomes easy to give a space even if a big hit does not occur, and the player will not get bored with the game. In addition, also in the 1st big hit A and the 1st small hit G it has set the Gases precursor sign production mode period. Since the player can not distinguish between the protagonist production mode and the squeeze advert production mode, it is possible that the player can play a game of the promo production mode period with the excitement of whether the mode development from the big hit to the rush mode occurs or not. it can.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game machine to which the pachinko machine 1 is applied is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 1st starting opening 2101a Always winning opening 2101b Special winning opening 2102 2nd starting opening 2111 Movable piece (Normal electric symbol)
2301 General-purpose gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board (Effect (display) control means, disadvantage gaming state indication means, effect change means, display means, effect switching means, effect execution means, movable combination control means, origin judgment means, Operation prohibition means, display frequency setting means, remaining number display means, adjustment means, effect determination means, pseudo effect means, transition indication effect means)
4100 main control board (game control means, first lottery game execution means, second lottery game execution means, specified game execution means, interlocking control means, result substitution means, the other detection means, disadvantage game state generation means, result change means, Temporary stop means, restart means, forced termination means, reset means, specific result derivation judgment means, gaming state setting means, advantageous gaming state transition means, award frequency setting means, execution frequency counting means, gaming state transition means, frequency counting means , Transition inhibition means, gaming state transition prohibition means, predetermined number of times determination means, predetermined number of times changing means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state,
Lottery game execution means capable of executing a lottery game based on the winning of the game medium to the pay area in the game area;
Gaming state transition means capable of transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when the lottery game derives a specific result;
An advantageous gaming state transition means capable of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, triggered by the number of times of execution of the lottery game reaching the predetermined number in the second gaming state;
A predetermined number of times determining means capable of determining the predetermined number of times so as to differ according to the specific result.